Catalog
Train Serv Cat Cover:**Train Serv CatSAF6A.qxd
4/26/2010
2:35 PM
Training Services Catalog
Unlock the Pieces for Improved Job Performance
Page 1
Train Serv Cat Cover:**Train Serv CatSAF6A.qxd
4/26/2010
2:36 PM
Page 2
Training Advisor
Assess the knowledge of your work force and build
your own training plan with an expert online consultant.
Unlock improved job performance potential
with the Rockwell Automation new online
knowledge assessment tool.
Training Advisor helps you determine a custom
training path for your work force to obtain the
knowledge required to successfully improve
on-the-job performance.
Training Advisor helps you identify skill and
knowledge gaps hindering production performance
and develop a training strategy that will maximize
job performance and effectiveness.
Training Advisor offers you the ability to customize
online assessments in the following areas based on
job tasks that you or your work force perform:
• Controllers
• Networks
• Motion Control
• Drives Control
• Safety
• Visualization
• Process Control
• General Industrial (Electrical and
Pneumatic) Control
Experience the many benefits of Training Advisor:
• Customize knowledge assessments based on
specific equipment and job tasks
• Capture a snapshot of current knowledge levels
prior to investing in training
• Create individual and group training plans
• Prioritize training based on your installed
equipment, job tasks, and the training needs
identified from knowledge assessment(s)
• Eliminate unnecessary expenses of training
your work force
• Justify training costs that will help improve
production performance
For more information on Training Advisor, go to
www.rockwellautomation.com/
services/training
01_TOC_Intro
5/6/2010
1:10 PM
Page 1
Table of Contents
Introduction – Maximize Your Job and Asset Performance
2
Instructor-Led Courses
3
ControlLogix®/RSLogix™ 5000
PLC-5®/RSLogix 5
17
SLC™ 500/RSLogix 500
25
Safety
33
Networks
43
Visualization
53
Motion Control
63
Drives
71
Process Control
83
Condition Monitoring
91
Software Courses
101
Classic Courses
111
Industrial, Quality, and Management Courses
113
Self-Paced e-Learning Courses
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5
127
Computer-Based Training
127
Web-Based Training
141
Workstations
155
Job Aids
177
Savings Program
183
Certificate Programs
185
Assessment Services
191
Enrollment and Registration
195
Index
203
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
1
01_TOC_Intro
5/6/2010
1:10 PM
Page 2
MAXIMIZE
Your Job and Asset Performance
To improve your job performance and the
performance of your automation assets, you need to
successfully obtain the right technical knowledge
and apply it when required—from installing new
equipment to maintaining an existing system.
However, traditional subject-based training
approaches, which often consist of randomly
selected lecture-only courses, can often fall short
in helping you reach your objectives.
• Comprehensive Course Materials—Use awardwinning materials in the classroom and for
ongoing review.
• Pre- and Post-tests—Quantify your knowledge
transfer and return on investment.
• Self-Paced Training Tools—Refresh your
classroom experience with computer
and web-based learning.
• Workstations—Practice what you have learned in
a simulated environment before applying it
on the job.
• Job Aids—Quickly reference practical, easy-to-use
procedural and troubleshooting information for a
wide variety of automation equipment and
technologies.
• Continuing Education Credits (CEUs) for Your
Professional Development—Earn CEU credits for
your professional development when you attend
many of our courses. Rockwell Automation is
authorized by the International
Association for Continuing
Education and Training.
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
Rockwell Automation Training Services has a
different approach. Our systematic, performancebased, training methodology gives you the right
combination of traditional instruction, hands-on
practice, and refresher exercises to maximize your
subject matter retention and successfully utilize that
knowledge day after day. Through our
performance-based training, you will receive:
• Curriculum Maps—Provide recommended
training paths based on your job
responsibilities within a technology area.
• Instruction from Experienced
Professionals—Obtain subject-matter
expertise on Rockwell Automation
and related equipment and technologies.
2
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
A performance-based training approach, such as that
utilized by Rockwell Automation, provides more individual
job productivity improvement and overall business impact
than subject-based training alone.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
01_TOC_Intro
5/6/2010
1:10 PM
Page 3
Instructor-Led Training
You can obtain in-person instruction on a wide range
of automation topics from our factory-trained
instructors. Each instructor brings extensive hands-on
experience and technical expertise to the classroom,
and will individually guide you through programming,
designing, maintaining, and troubleshooting to help
you optimize the performance of your automation
assets and meet your goals.
Standard Open Enrollment Courses
You can choose from over 250 open enrollment
classes designed around the use of automation
technologies by job function. Industrial, quality, and
management courses are also available covering
topics like safety, electrical, and manufacturing.
Classes are conducted at Rockwell Automation and
partner locations.
Tailored Training Courses
Developed in a modular format, tailored training
allows you to select from 1600 specific lessons in our
standard courses to build the class content that will
meet your specific needs.
Custom Courses
If standard and tailored training courses do not meet
your needs, Rockwell Automation can develop
custom curricula to your exact specifications. Custom
courses include content specific to your automation
environment and can be delivered using your
automation equipment, software, and system
configuration. This highly effective training solution is
often required for your critical plant areas or
applications.
On-Site and Private Training Courses
Any instructor-led course can be conducted at your
plant or private location, thereby eliminating the time
and cost to travel. On-site courses also offer the
exclusive benefit of free pre-and post-tests, which
benchmark students’ knowledge before and after
training. Using the data captured from the tests
enables you to quantify the return on your training
investment.
Embedded Instructors
If you have a large production environment with
ongoing and diverse professional development needs,
you may benefit from an embedded
Rockwell Automation instructor to meet your
continuous training needs. Embedded instructors can
deliver standard, tailored, and custom courses.
Our exclusive technology-based curriculum
maps help you select the right instructor-led
and self-paced training to obtain, practice,
and refresh the automation skills and
knowledge you need to maximize your
success on the job.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
3
01_TOC_Intro
5/6/2010
1:10 PM
Page 4
Self-Paced Training
Competency Testing
An ideal solution for busy professionals, our
self-paced, self-directed training courses and products
will help you acquire and retain new skills at your
own pace and location.
With competency testing, you will ensure that your
staff has acquired the necessary automation
knowledge and skills to perform required tasks. You
can select from either standard or custom evaluation
solutions in print or electronic formats.
Computer-Based Training
You can obtain hands-on training
on a variety of Rockwell Automation products and
automation related topics through our computer-based
training courses on CD. Our computer-based training
provides engaging interactive exercises and
simulations to enhance your learning experience right at your desk. Post-tests measure your knowledge
transfer after completion of a course.
Web-Based Training
With Rockwell Automation
web-based training, you can utilize
the power and flexibility of the
Internet to obtain on-demand training courses at
your convenience.
Job Aids
You can quickly obtain
essential job task
information to minimize
automation-related
problems with Rockwell Automation job aids. These
guides are published in a compact format and
include an extensive selection of procedures guides,
troubleshooting guides, and reference guides
covering a diverse range of technologies and
job functions.
Workstations
Training workstations are the ideal tool to reinforce
and practice maintenance,
troubleshooting, and
programming skills;
train new employees;
and ease the transition
from one technology to another.
Rockwell Automation workstations are available for
a variety of technologies and can be customized
to meet your needs.
4
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Integrated Performance Assessments
Not sure what type of training solution is right for
you or your staff? An Integrated Performance
Assessment from Rockwell Automation will provide
the answer.
Integrated Performance Assessments are used to
capture and analyze current job skills and provide
a recommended training path and related activities
to improve on-the-job performance.
NEW! Training Advisor
Training Advisor is an online solution for assessing
your employees' training needs.
For more information, refer to the inside cover of
this catalog and visit our website at
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training.
Rockwell Automation
Services & Support
Rockwell Automation Services & Support has a
broad portfolio that can help you meet your
everyday technical needs and maximize your
automation investment. For more information go to
www.rockwellautomation.com/services or contact
your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:11 PM
Page 5
ControlLogix/_____
RSLogix_____
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
ControlLogix®/RSLogix™ 5000
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:11 PM
Page 2
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000 Curriculum Map
Program
and
Design
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
Project Development
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Function Block
Programming
CCP151
CCP143
CCP152
2 Days
4 Days
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
ControlLogix
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP153
4 Days
2 Days
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Motion Programming
Using Ladder Logic
CCN142
3 Days
Kinetix 6000 Level 4:
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCN200
2 Days
Maintain
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
CompactLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
CCCL21
Understand
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
CIA101
Elective Course
6
2 Days
CCP298
4.5 Days
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
PLC-5 to ControlLogix
Transitioning
CCP146
CCP299
CCP710
2 Days
4.5 Days
2 Days
2 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Understand
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
RSLogix 5000 Level 5:
Advanced Motion
Programming
CCN190-LD
4/26/2010
2:11 PM
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Structured Text/
Sequential Function Chart
Programming
2 Days
CCP154
2 Days
Page 3
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
PhaseManager
Project Design
CCP711
1 Day
Fuzzy Logic Design
and Development
PRS012
2 Days
Related e-Learning Products
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000
Software Project Configuration
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000
Software Offline Programming
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000
Software Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000
Software - Motion
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
(9393-RSTLKPRJENF)
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
(9393-RSTLKOFFENF)
9393-RSTLX5KON
(9393-RSTLKONENF)
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
(9393-RSTLKMOTENF)
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000
Software Bundle
9393-RSTLX5KALL
(9393-RSTLKALLENF)
RSTrainer for
ControlLogix
Fundamentals
9393-RSTCLX
(9393-RSTCLXENF)
RSLogix 5000
Software Project Configuration
Computer-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSLogix 5000
Software Offline Programming
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
RSLogix 5000
Software Online Monitoring
RSLogix 5000
Software - Motion
Web-Based Training –
Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
7
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 8
_____ControlLogix/
_____ RSLogix
Training + Starter Workstation
Attend Rockwell Automation ControlLogix courses and
maintain your skills with our Starter Workstation
Training + Starter Workstations
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix System Fundamentals
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
with Ethernet (CCP146E)
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
(CCP146-W)
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
with Ethernet (CCP299E)
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
(CCP299W)
Take Your Classroom Training Back to Your Job
Five Rockwell Automation ControlLogix courses are bundled with a
CompactLogix Starter Workstation to provide an opportunity for ongoing practice.
This offer is optional; however, the CompactLogix Starter Workstation allows you to
reinforce the skills acquired from any of the ControlLogix training classes.
CompactLogix Starter Workstation
Your CompactLogix Starter Workstation will include the following:
• Option: 1 CompactLogix
L31 processor (512K memory) or 1 CompactLogix L35E
Ethernet processor (1.5MB memory)
• 1 CompactLogix AC power supply
• 1 digital combo, 6 digital in/4 digital out
• 4 momentary push buttons
• 2 selector switches
• 1 Compactbus end cap
• 1 serial port programming cable
• AmeriPak shipping case
Dimensions
• Width - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Height - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Depth - 6 in. (15 cm)
• Weight - 15 lb (7 kg)
8
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
with Ethernet (CCCL21E)
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
(CCCL21W)
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic Programming
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
with Ethernet (CCP151E)
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
(CCP151W)
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
ControlLogix Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
with Ethernet (CCP153E)
• CompactLogix Starter Workstation
(CCP153W)
To enroll in a Rockwell Automation
training class: contact an authorized
Allen-Bradley distributor, a
Rockwell Automation local sales office or
call (440) 646-3434 (select option #4). For
more information about ControlLogix
courses and other training products
and services, visit http://www.rockwell
automation.com/services/training.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 9
ControlLogix/_____
RSLogix_____
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
Introduction to Automation
and the Integrated Architecture™ System
CIA101
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about
and interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration
tasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products
function together within the Integrated Architecture System.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Program a basic RSLogix 5000 project for an integrated system
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
• Understand Logix5000™ multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix System Fundamentals
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the
Integrated Architecture System
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
CCP146
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a solid fundamental knowledge of Logix5000 systems and terminology. Students will be
introduced to Logix5000 system components and functionality and will have an opportunity to use RSLogix 5000 software to perform basic system networking and
configuration tasks.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify Logix5000 system components
• Identify RSLogix 5000 software components
• Create and modify an RSLogix 5000 project
• Transfer a project file to a Logix5000 controller
• Configure local 1756- I/O modules
• Create tags and monitor data in an RSLogix 5000 project
• Draft basic ladder logic for an RSLogix 5000 routine
• Select basic ladder logic instruments for an RSLogix 5000 routine
• Enter ladder logic components in an RSLogix 5000 routine
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who have little or no working experience with Logix5000 systems
or other programmable controllers
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Job Aids Included
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
RSLogix5000 and Logix5000 Fundamentals
Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ53
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
9
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 10
_____ControlLogix/
_____ RSLogix
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix
Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
CCP299
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 3.2
4.5 Days
Course Purpose
This course assists students in building a solid foundation and fundamental knowledge of ControlLogix and other Logix5000 systems (e.g., CompactLogix™,
FlexLogix™, DriveLogix™, and SoftLogix™). Students will be introduced to basic concepts and terminology, and they will be exposed to Logix5000 system hardware.
The course builds upon this knowledge and presents students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational
Logix5000™ system. Students will be presented with a systematic strategy to diagnose and troubleshoot a variety of system problems, such as software
configuration issues, electrical noise, controller, I/O, and other possible hardware issues.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify system and software components, and local I/O tags
• Connect a computer to a communications network
• Create tags and monitor data
• Edit ladder logic online
• Monitor GSV/SSV instructions and arrays/tags of user-defined data types
• Force I/O and toggle bits
• Troubleshoot controller, digital I/O, analog I/O, and remote I/O, power
supply, and noise problems
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix or other
Logix5000 system, but have no current working experience with Logix5000
systems
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Job Aids Included
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of basic ladder logic instructions (bit, timer, counter, etc.) through previous training and/or personal experience
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSJ20
ABT-1756-DRG70
CCP710
PLC-5® to ControlLogix Transitioning
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course introduces students to the basic tasks involved in configuring and programming a ControlLogix controller and the terminology associated with ControlLogix
systems. Upon completion of this course, students with basic PLC-5 processor experience will be able to create a simple project for a ControlLogix controller.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify Logix5000 platforms and components
• Identify programming languages within an integrated system
• Communicate with a Logix5000 controller
• Create and organize a new RSLogix 5000 project
• Organize data
• Configure a Logix5000 controller to produce and consume data
• Convert PLC-5 or SLC™ 500 logic to Logix5000-based logic
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to program a ControlLogix controller and are already familiar
with PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
10
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSG10
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 11
ControlLogix/_____
RSLogix_____
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
CCCL21
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building course that provides maintainers with a basic understanding of RSLogix 5000 ladder logic instructions and terminology. It also provides
the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently modify basic ladder logic instructions for a Logix5000 controller. Students will use RSLogix 5000
software to perform basic software tasks.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Apply ladder logic strategies and techniques
• Document and search ladder logic
• Modify timer and counter instructions
• Modify program control instructions
• Modify compare instructions
• Modify compute and math instructions
• Modify move instructions
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little experience with controllers
• Need to learn how to interpret ladder logic
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic Programming
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
CCP151
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course provides programmers with a basic understanding of RSLogix 5000 ladder logic instructions and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are
provided to program basic ladder logic instructions for a Logix5000 controller. Students will use RSLogix 5000 software to perform basic software tasks to meet
the requirements of a given functional specification.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Start and test a ladder diagram
• Program timer and counter instructions
• Program control instructions
• Program compare, move, math, and BTD instructions
• Program and separate the procedure from equipment control
• Document and search and handle expressions
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little controller experience
• Are responsible for programming Logix5000 controllers
• Need to draft ladder logic
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
11
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 12
_____ControlLogix/
_____ RSLogix
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: ControlLogix
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP153
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational ControlLogix or other
Logix5000 system (e.g., CompactLogix, FlexLogix, DriveLogix, and SoftLogix). It builds upon students’ fundamental knowledge of common controller terms and
operation, ability to identify and create fundamental RSLogix 5000 project components, and experience interpreting basic ladder logic. This course adds to
students’ skill sets by introducing new tasks, such as connecting to a network, interpreting project execution, and editing ladder logic online. After practicing such
skills, students will be presented with a systematic strategy for diagnosing and troubleshooting a variety of system errors, such as controller, I/O, and other
hardware problems; noise-related problems; and software configuration problems.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Monitor and edit tags
• Edit ladder logic and function block diagrams
• Apply preventative maintenance and troubleshooting strategies
• Troubleshoot controller problems
• Force I/O and toggle bits
• Troubleshoot digital, analog, and remote I/O
• Troubleshoot power supply and noise-related problems
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSJ20
Kinetix® 6000 Level 4: Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a ControlLogix or other
Logix 5000 system
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
course (CCCL21) or equivalent experience with basic ladder logic instructions
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146)
CCN200
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course provides students with skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system. Students will practice operating and troubleshooting the
system through hands-on exercises using RSLogix 5000 software. Students will also learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motion control system.
Students will practice identifying faults related to hardware and software by employing methods such as fault code tables, system LEDs, and other status indicators.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a
Kinetix 6000 system.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify Kinetix 6000 system components
• Connect a Kinetix 6000 servo system
• Interpret Kinetix 6000 system LEDs and status indicators
• Analyze fault codes in a Kinetix 6000 system
• Use fault routines in a Logix5000 SERCOS motion control application
• Interpret and monitor motion instructions in an RSLogix 5000 project
• Troubleshoot general Kinetix 6000 system problems and replace components
• Troubleshoot a basic RSLogix 5000 project on a Kinetix 6000 servo system
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control
Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
12
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6000 motion control
systems
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or
equivalent experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position
loop systems
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience with the ControlLogix platform and
basic ladder logix
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 13
ControlLogix/_____
RSLogix_____
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
PhaseManager™ Project Design
CCP711
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications in accordance with the S88 state model using the
PhaseManager feature. This course presents a tool that will help you effectively organize and structure batch applications. Students will organize an RSLogix 5000
project by identifying control and equipment modules within application code. They will separate equipment code from equipment phase code, configure state logic
to transition between equipment states, and complete a project that uses an internal sequencer to activate each of the equipment phases according to
a batch procedure.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Define equipment phases and state models in an RSLogix 5000 project
• Separate equipment code from equipment phase code
• Test an equipment phase
• Configure an internal sequencer using phase instructions
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to apply the S88 state model to RSLogix 5000 projects for
any Logix5000 controller
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or advanced programming experience using RSLogix 5000 software
• Familiarity with sequential function chart programming language
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
Project Development
CCP143
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
Given a functional specification for a Logix5000 application, students will be able to develop a project during the course to meet the specification requirements. This
course covers tasks common to all controllers that use the Logix5000 control engine or operating system, including ControlLogix, FlexLogix, CompactLogix, SoftLogix,
and DriveLogix controllers. This course instructs students on project development tasks, including organizing a project, organizing data, and configuring modules
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Communicate with a controller
• Create and organize a new project
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
• Communicate with a local I/O module
• Configure a controller to produce and consume data
• Create a periodic and event task
• Communicate with a remote I/O module
• Retrieve and set controller status values with GSV/SSV instructions
• Document, search, and manage project files
• Allocate connections
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to develop projects for Logix5000 applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or completion of the RSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals
computer-based training (9393-RSTCLX)
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming
course (CCP151) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
13
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 14
_____ControlLogix/
_____ RSLogix
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Structured Text/Sequential Function
Chart Programming
CCP154
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
During this course, students will be able to practice programming structured text and sequential function chart routines in an RSLogix 5000 project to meet the
requirements of a given specification. Building on students’ project development skills, such as creating tags and configuring I/O, this course provides the skills and
knowledge to program using the structured text and sequential function chart programming languages. Students will learn how to select instructions, expressions, and
constructs, and then enter these elements and more into a routine. Students will also learn how to test sequential function chart logic using forces and step throughs.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Design a sequential function chart
• Program and test a sequential function chart
• Store, pause, and reset sequential chart data
• Program assignments, expressions, and instructions in structured text
• Program constructs and comments in structured text
Job Aids Included
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-DRG70
ABT-1756-TSJ50
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion
Programming Using Ladder Logic
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to program structured text and sequential function chart
routines in RSLogix 5000 projects for any Logix5000 controller
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or completion of the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Offline Programming
computer-based training course or experience with basic RSLogix 5000 projects
(navigating the software, creating tags, creating routines, etc.)
CCN142
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality using ladder logic,
including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axis motion control system while
developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharing tasks between multiple controllers,
programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a Logix5000 system for motion control applications
• Configure SERCOS servo axes
• Test and tune axes
• Program a basic motion routines
• Program a fault routine
• Program an electronic gearing routine
• Program an electronic camming routine
• Program a virtual axis
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
14
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Are already familiar with Logix5000 systems and general motion control
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 15
ControlLogix/_____
RSLogix_____
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
RSLogix 5000 Level 5:
Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality
using ladder logic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axis
motion control system while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharing
tasks between multiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Program motion using the coordinated move instruction
• Manually tune axes
• Perform an electronic cam function
• Program output and pending cam instructions
• Program motion event functions
• Use structured text
• Introduction to power programming
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control
Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Function Block Programming
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Are already familiar with Logix5000 systems and general motion control
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Project Development course (CCN143) or equivalent
experience with basic ladder logic programming
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using Ladder Logic
course (CCN142) or equivalent experience
CCP152
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course provides students with an understanding of RSLogix 5000 function block diagrams and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are also provided
to program a Logix5000 controller using function block diagrams. Students will perform parameter modifications to function block instructions and create and
develop function block diagram programs and routines.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a function block diagram
• Program logical function block instructions
• Program timer and counter function block instructions
• Program analog function block instructions
• Program device driver function block instructions
• Insert ActiveX faceplates from function block instructions
• Select timing modes in a function block instruction
• Program and monitor an RMPS (ramp/soak) function block instruction
• Control program flow using function block instructions
• Program a function block PIDE instruction
• Develop an add-on instruction in function block fiagram
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for developing, debugging, and programming Logix5000
controllers using function block diagrams
• Use Active-X controls in an operator interface, such as RSView®32 software
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understanding of basic measurement and control theory,
including basic loop control
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
15
02_ControlLogix_RSLogix
5/6/2010
1:12 PM
Page 16
_____ControlLogix/
_____ RSLogix
PRS012
Fuzzy Logic Design and Development
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills to produce a fuzzy control system for a continuous process application. It introduces the range of options for fuzzy
systems but focuses on using fuzzy logic to adjust the gains of a PID loop to meet specific control requirements. Starting with a description of a process, students
will decide whether fuzzy logic is the best control method, and then will design a fuzzy system, develop it in FuzzyDesigner software, and implement it in a
Logix5000 controller. Students will also use FuzzyDesigner’s simulation, graphing, and online monitoring tools to validate the system against control requirements.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Choose a control scheme
• Identify terms and membership parameters
• Write rules
• Create FuzzyDesigner components
• Simulate a Fuzzy system’s execution
• Graph inputs and outputs
• Create and monitor a Fuzzy add-on instruction
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: CompactLogix™
Fundamentals and Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to design, develop, or implement advanced process control
applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Ability to perform these RSLogix 5000 software skills:
- Entering and editing logic
- Downloading and going online
- Monitoring and editing data
• Completetion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix
System Fundementals course (CCP146)
CCP298
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
Course Purpose
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation and fundamental knowledge of CompactLogix systems. They will be introduced to
basic concepts and terminology, and system hardware. Building upon this knowledge, students will be provided with the resources and hands-on practice required
to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational CompactLogix system. Students will be presented with a systematic strategy for diagnosing and troubleshooting
a variety of system problems, such as software configuration issues, electrical noise, controller, I/O, and other possible hardware issues.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify system and software components
• Connect a computer to a communications network
• Communicate with a Logix5000 controller
• Interpret RSLogix 5000 project organization and execution
• Configure local 1769-I/O modules
• Create tags and monitor data
• Draft and select basic ladder logic/instructions
• Edit ladder logic online
• Monitor arrays and tags of user-defined data types
• Document and print components and search for project components
• Apply preventative maintenance and troubleshooting strategies
• Monitor GSV/SSV instructions
• Troubleshoot controller problems, digital and analog I/O problems,
remote I/O, power supplies, noise problems
• Troubleshoot and monitor a system using a trend chart
16
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a CompactLogix system, but
have no current working experience with Logix5000 system
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of basic ladder logic instructions (bit, timer, counter, etc.)
through previous training and/or experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSG10
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:13 PM
Page 17
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
03_PLC-5_RSLogix 5
PLC-5®/RSLogix™ 5
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:12 PM
Page 4
PLC-5/RSLogix 5 Curriculum Map
SLC 500 and PLC-5
Communications
CCPS65
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Programming
Program and Design
CCP410
CCP412
18
4 Days
PLC-5/SLC 500
and RSLogix
Fundamentals
CCP122
Elective Course
4 Days
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Maintain
Understand
1 Day
2 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Understand
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:12 PM
Page 5
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Advanced
Programming
PLC-5 to ControlLogix
Transitioning
CCP411
CCP710
4.5 Days
2 Days
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Advanced
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP409
4 Days
Related e-Learning Products
PLC Fundamentals
Computer-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5 Software
RSTrainer for
RSLinx Software
9393-RSTLX5
(9393-RSTLX5ENF)
9393-RSTLINX
(9393-RSTLINXENF)
Web-Based Training –
Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
19
03_PLC-5_RSLogix 5
5/6/2010
1:14 PM
Page 20
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLC-5/SLC™ 500 and RSLogix
Fundamentals
CCP122
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is an introduction to programmable controller systems. Students will learn about programmable controller systems, how they work, and how they can
be used to control various processes and machines. They will receive a thorough introduction to RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software, and will learn how to transfer,
monitor, and run projects on a PLC-5 or SLC 500 processor and how to interpret simple ladder logic.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify main processor components and functions
• Identify hardware components of I/O systems
• Identify I/O configurations
• Change the radix (base) of a number
• Set up communications between a programming system and a processor
• Identify PLC-5 and SLC 500 system addresses
• Interpret simple ladder logic
• Interpret Timer On-Delay (TON) and Count Up (CTU) instructions
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are new to PLC-5/SLC 500 systems and applications using
RSLogix software
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
CCP412
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This skill-building course provides students with the knowledge and the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common hardware problems related to
noise, power, and discrete and analog I/O. In troubleshooting scenarios, students are introduced on basic ladder logic interpretation, which is applied to diagnostic
tasks. Students practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions in an RSLogix 5 project.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Communicate with a PLC-5 processor
• Monitor and enter data
• Interpret instructions
• Edit and search ladder logic
• Document and search a project
• Force inputs and outputs
• Configure and preview a project report
• Create a histogram and trend chart
• Troubleshoot noise, discrete and analog I/O, I/O channel and chassis,
and processor/power supply problems
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to isolate and correct problems in a 1785 PLC-5 system
• Make changes to RSLogix 5 programs or hardware
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers or completion of the
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
Job Aids Included
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
20
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1785-TSJ22
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1785-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:14 PM
Page 21
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
03_PLC-5_RSLogix 5
CCP409
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.8
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course builds upon students’ knowledge of basic maintenance and troubleshooting techniques and provides the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose
problems found in advanced PLC-5 applications. Students will interpret and modify advanced ladder logic instructions in troubleshooting scenarios. In addition,
students practice diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions and troubleshooting communications problems with Data Highway Plus™ (DH+™) and
remote I/O networks.
Course Objectives
Who Should Attend?
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting advanced
• Troubleshoot DH+ communications
PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 5 software
• Troubleshoot program flow and interrupt routines
• Troubleshoot sequential function charts
Difficulty Level
Advanced
• Troubleshoot multiple main control programs
• Troubleshoot fault, STI, and PII routines
Prerequisites
• Troubleshoot FSC, immediate I/O update, shift register, and sequencer instructions • Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Troubleshoot message and PID instructions
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Troubleshoot analog data transfers
• Completion of the PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
• Troubleshoot data transfers between scanner and adapter
course (CCP412)
• Troubleshoot indexed and indirect addressing
Job Aids Included
Catalog #
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1785-TSJ22
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1785-DRG70
CCP410
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This course introduces students to programming techniques and instructions to configure and program a 1785 PLC-5 system. The instructor will demonstrate how to
use programming instructions and techniques to create a ladder logic project. Students will be given exercises that provide them with hands-on practice using
RSLogix 5 software to program a PLC-5 processor.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Establish communications
• Configure channels
• Identify addresses and organize the data table
• Draft ladder logic
• Program instructions
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
• Select and program timer and counter instructions
• Control program flow
• Convert integer values to and from binary coded decimal values
• Select and program mathematical, compare, and manipulation instructions
• Configure and preview a project printout
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who have to write ladder logic projects for 1785 PLC-5 processors
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience with basic control and electrical principles
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1785-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
21
03_PLC-5_RSLogix 5
5/6/2010
1:14 PM
Page 22
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5
Advanced Programming
CCP411
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 3.2
4.5 Days
Course Purpose
This course will help provide students with the skills needed to program PLC-5 processors using RSLogix 5 software. Students will practice using advanced programming
techniques and instructions. The instructor will demonstrate all relevant procedures, then provide students with realistic situations in which to practice those procedures.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Set up a PLC-5 system on a DH+ network
• Plan program flow strategies
• Program SFCs, MCPs, and advanced routines
• Program various advanced instructions
• Apply indirect and indexed addressing
• Transfer data between processors and analog modules
• Tranfer data between scanner and adapter processors
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to write or interpret ladder logic projects using advanced
programming techniques and instructions for PLC-5 processors
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming course (CCP410)
or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1785-DRG70
CCP710
PLC-5 to ControlLogix® Transitioning
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course introduces students to the basic tasks involved in configuring and programming a ControlLogix controller. Students will be introduced to the terminology
associated with ControlLogix systems. Upon completion of this course, students with basic PLC-5 processor experience will be able to create a simple project for
a ControlLogix controller.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify Logix5000™ platforms and components
• Identify programming languages within an integrated system
• Communicate with a Logix5000 controller
• Create and organize a new RSLogix 5000 project
• Organize data
• Configure a Logix5000 controller to produce and consume data
• Convert PLC-5 or SLC 500 logic to Logix5000-based logic
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to program a ControlLogix controller and are already familiar
with PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic
Difficulty Level
System-Level
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
22
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSG10
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:14 PM
Page 23
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
03_PLC-5_RSLogix 5
CCPS65
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Purpose
This blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx® software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure
and manage various communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, students
will learn how to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a Data Highway Plus (DH+) communications and serial driver in
RSLinx® software
• Navigate RSLinx software
• Download and upload a project
• Go online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 processor
• Change the processor operating mode
• Determine available system resources on RSLinx software
• Apply diagnostic tools and utilities
• Configure client application communications
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and
troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5
software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1747-DRG70
Try Our Web-Based and Computer-Based Training for Free!
Sign up for a free 5-day trial of our web-based training
and visit Rockwell Automation University Online!
Go to: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/webbased.html
You can select from a list of
computer-based course titles and
download a demo at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/
services/training/demo.html
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
23
03_PLC-5_RSLogix 5
5/6/2010
1:14 PM
Page 24
TRAINING
SERVICES
Don’t Delay Getting the Training You Need. Enroll Now!
Call 440-646-3434
(Option 4)
E-mail training requests to:
[email protected]
To view course schedules, go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/
services/training/schedules.html
Maximize Your Training Investment with a Voucher Account
Do you have diverse employee development needs but a limited training budget?
Our Training Voucher Account maximizes your
training budget by allowing you to prepurchase
vouchers for Rockwell Automation training courses
and products at a discounted cost (up to 20%).
You can redeem the vouchers at the time that
best meets the individual needs and schedule
of each employee.
The vouchers can be redeemed at any time within
one year for instructor-led courses, self-paced
training, job aids, and workstations. A convenient
online account management tool and monthly
statement help you track your voucher usage.
For more information, go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/savingsprogram.html
or contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
5/6/2010
1:15 PM
Page 25
SLC™ 500/RSLogix™ 500
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
04_SLC 500_RSLogix 500
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:13 PM
Page 6
SLC 500/RSLogix 500 Curriculum Map
MicroLogix 1400
Processor Embedded
Web Server
Management
MicroLogix 1400
Processor Installation
and Data Monitoring
CCPM41
CCPM43
1 Day
1 Day
SLC 500 and PLC-5
Communications
Program and Design
CCPS65
1 Day
SLC 500 and
RSLogix 500
Advanced
Programming
SLC 500 and
RSLogix 500
Programming
CCPS41
CCPS43
4 Days
SLC 500 and
RSLogix 500
Advanced Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
SLC 500 and
RSLogix 500
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Maintain
4 Days
CCPS45
4 Days
PLC-5/SLC 500
and RSLogix
Fundamentals
Understand
CCP122
Elective Course
26
CCPS42
4 Days
2 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Understand
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:13 PM
Page 7
MicroLogix 1400
Processor Installation,
Data Monitoring and
Embedded Web Server
Management
CCPM44*
2 Days
*Combination of CCPM41
and CCPM43 courses
Related e-Learning Products
SLC 500 Bundle
9393-RSTSLCALENE
9393-RSTSLCALENF
RSCompanion
for SLC 500 and
MicroLogix Processors
RSTrainer for
SLC 500-Hardware
Fundamentals
RSTrainer for
SLC 500-Programming
Fundamentals
RSTrainer for
RSLinx Software
9393-RSCOMP500
9393-RSTSLCHENE
(9393-RSTSLCHENF)
9393-RSTSLCPENE
(9393-RSTSLCPENF)
9393-RSTLINX
(9393-RSTLINXENF)
RSTrainer RSLogix 500
Software Bundle
9393-RST500ALENE
9393-RST500ALENF
Spanish
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 SoftwareOffline Programming
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500
SoftwareOffline Programming
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500
SoftwareOnline Monitoring
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500
Software-Documenting
and Searching
9393-RST500OFESE
(9393-RST500OFESF)
9393-RST500OFENE
(9393-RST500OFENF)
9393-RST500ONENE
(9393-RST500ONENF)
9393-RST500DSENE
(9393-RST500DSENF)
SLC 500
Programming
Fundamentals
SLC 500
Hardware
Fundamentals
RSLogix 500
SoftwareOffline
Programming
RSLogix 500
SoftwareOnline Monitoring
RSLogix 500
SoftwareDocumenting and
Searching
Now
Available
in Spanish
Computer-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
Web-Based Training –
Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
27
04_SLC 500_RSLogix 500
5/6/2010
1:16 PM
Page 28
PLC-5®/SLC 500 and RSLogix
Fundamentals
CCP122
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Purpose
This course is an introduction to programmable controller systems. Students will learn about programmable controller systems, how they work, and how they can be
used to control various processes and machines. Students will also receive a thorough introduction to RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software. Students will learn how to
transfer, monitor, and run projects on a PLC-5 or SLC 500 processor and how to interpret simple ladder logic.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify main processor components and functions
• Identify hardware components of I/O systems
• Identify I/O configurations
• Change the radix (base) of a number
• Set up communications between a programming system and a processor
• Identify PLC-5 and SLC 500 system addresses
• Interpret simple ladder logic
• Interpret Timer On Delay (TON) and Count Up (CTU) instructions
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are new to PLC-5/SLC 500 systems and applications using
RSLogix software
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
CCPS65
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx® software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure
and manage various communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, students
will learn how to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a Data Highway Plus™ (DH+™) communications and serial driver in
RSLinx software
• Navigate RSLinx software
• Download and upload a project
• Go online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 processor
• Change the processor operating mode
• Determine available system resources on RSLinx software
• Apply diagnostic tools and utilities
• Configure client application communications
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and
troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5
software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
28
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1747-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
04_SLC 500_RSLogix 500
5/6/2010
1:16 PM
Page 29
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCPS43
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.8
4 Days
Optional (not included)
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Purpose
This skill-building course provides the necessary practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common hardware problems related to noise, power, and
discrete and analog I/O. In troubleshooting scenarios, students are introduced to basic ladder logic interpretation, which is applied to diagnostic tasks.
Students practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions in an RSLogix 500 project.
Course Objectives
Who Should Attend?
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who need to troubleshoot and maintain SLC 500 systems
• Monitor and enter data
using RSLogix 500 software
• Troubleshoot processor, power supply, and noise-related problems
• Troubleshoot discrete and analog I/O problems
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
• Search, document, and edit ladder logic
• Create a histogram
Prerequisites
• Force inputs and outputs
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Interpret various ladder logic instructions
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers or completion of the
Job Aids Included
Catalog #
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ22
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
9393-EGLX500
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCPS45
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This course provides the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose problems found in advanced SLC 500 applications. In troubleshooting scenarios,
students interpret and modify advanced ladder logic instructions by operating simulation devices and HMI applications, such as PanelView™ terminals and
RSView®32 software applications. Students practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions and troubleshooting communications
problems with DH+ and remote I/O networks.
Course Objectives
Who Should Attend?
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting advanced
• Troubleshoot RSLogix 500 projects containing the following:
SLC 500 applications using RSLogix 500 software
- STI, DII, and fault routines
- Immediate I/O update, shift register, sequencer, and PID instructions
Difficulty Level
Advanced
- Indexed and indirect addressing
Prerequisites
- Message instructions for DH+ communications
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
- Remote I/O addressing
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
- Discrete data transfers on a remote I/O link
• Completion of the SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and
- Block transfers on a remote I/O link
Troubleshooting course (CCPS43)
Job Aids Included
Catalog #
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ22
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
9393-EGLX500
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
29
04_SLC 500_RSLogix 500
5/6/2010
1:16 PM
Page 30
CCPS41
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.8
4 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice to program an SLC 500 processor. Students will create a program step-by-step to meet
the requirements of a given functional specification. As each section of the program is built, students will gain experience that can be applied to more advanced
RSLogix 500 projects.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a new project and draft ladder logic
• Determine program flow and create subroutines
• Select and program various instructions
• Enter and search for documentation
• Test a project
• Configure and preview a project report
• Communicate with an SLC 500 processor
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
9393-EGLX500
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for programming SLC 500 applications using
RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with basic control and electrical principles
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers, or
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
CCPS42
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Advanced Programming
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This course provides programmers with skills to develop advanced ladder logic projects for SLC 500 systems using RSLogix 500 software. This course covers several
networking options, particularly DH+ and remote I/O communications. Students will be introduced to DH+ and remote I/O communications configurations and will
have the opportunity to program advanced instructions for data transfer over a DH+ network and a remote I/O link.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Plan program flow strategies
• Program STI, DII, and fault routines
• Apply immediate I/O update instructions
• Program shift register, sequencer, and PID instructions
• Assign remote I/O addresses
• Configure an SLC 500 system for discrete data transfers and block transfers
on a remote I/O link
30
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
9393-EGLX500
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to program advanced ladder logic instructions
• Set up and configure SLC 500 systems for DH+ and/or remote
I/O communications
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with basic control and electrical principles
• Completion of the SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming course (CCPS41)
• Apply indirect and indexed addressing
• Program a message instruction for DH+ communications
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
04_SLC 500_RSLogix 500
5/6/2010
1:16 PM
Page 31
MicroLogix™ 1400 Processor Installation
and Data Monitoring
CCPM41
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install the processor
• Use the LCD and keypad
• Monitor user defined target files
• Use the mode switch and user defined LCD
• Configure the Ethernet port on the processor
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Embedded
Web Server Management
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently install a MicroLogix 1400 processor and monitor data. Each lesson in
this course is devoted to a step in the installation and data monitoring sequence. Students will begin by learning about the hardware features of the MicroLogix
1400 processor. Next, students will install their own MicroLogix processor on a DIN Rail. Students will then learn a step-by-step procedure on how to monitor
data using the LCD and keypad. Students will be given an opportunity to apply what you have learned by monitoring data in your MicroLogix 1400 processor.
Students can take the installed and programmed MicroLogix processor home for additional practice.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to install and monitor data on a MicroLogix 1400 processor
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Basic experience with MicroLogix processors or SLC processors (including the
ability to go online and program basic ladder logic)
CCPM43
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently monitor data for their MicroLogix1400 processor remotely over an
Ethernet/IP network. Each lesson in the course is devoted to a step in the process of accessing processor and control systems data with remote access applications.
After each procedure has been demonstrated, students will be given an opportunity to apply what they have learned by accessing a simple web page view and the
custom designed user-provided page views. Students will receive a kit of hardware in this course. Students can take the installed and programmed MicroLogix
processor home for additional practice.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand the embedded web server
• Monitor processor diagnostics
• Configure server settings and user accounts
• Understand simple web pages
• Generate user-provided web pages
• Optional: Configure an Ethernet network
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to remotely access processor and control system data for
MicroLogix 1400 processor
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Basic experience with MicroLogix processors or SLC processors (including the
ability to go online and program basic ladder logic)
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
31
04_SLC 500_RSLogix 500
5/6/2010
1:16 PM
Page 32
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Installation,
Data Monitoring, and Embedded Web
Server Management
CCPM44 *
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently install a MicroLogix 1400 processor and monitor data. Students will
begin by learning about the hardware features of the MicroLogix 1400 processor. Next, students will install their own MicroLogix processor on a DIN Rail.
Students will then learn a step-by-step procedure on how to monitor data using the LCD and keypad. Students will also be given the resources and hands-on
practice required to efficiently monitor data for your MicroLogix 1400 processor remotely over an Ethernet network. Students will learn to access control systems
data with remote access applications. Students will be given an opportunity to access a simple web page view and the custom user-provided page views. Students
can take the installed and programmed MicroLogix system home for additional practice.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install the processor
• Use the LCD and keypad
• Monitor user defined target files
• Use the mode switch and user defined LCD
• Configure the Ethernet port on the processor
• Understand the embedded web server
• Monitor processor diagnostics
• Configure server settings and user accounts
• Understand simple web pages
• Generate user-provided web pages
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to install a MicroLogix 1400 processor, monitor data, and
work with the embedded web server
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Basic experience with MicroLogix processors or SLC processors (including the
ability to go online and program basic ladder logic)
* Course CCPM44 is a combination class of courses CCPM41 and CCPM43.
No Time for Class?
Learn Any Time, Any Place, and at Any Pace!
Self-paced training courses are delivered via
the web at Rockwell Automation University
Online. Purchase ePasses to activate training
from Rockwell Automation University Online.
Rockwell Automation University Online
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Your benefits include:
• Significant cost savings when purchasing a
20, 50, or 100 pack of ePasses
• Unlimited refresher training opportunities
for one year from date of purchase.
You can repeat courses as many times as
needed without using additional ePasses!
• Easy budgeting and purchasing with
package offerings
• Easy redemption because only one ePass
is needed to activate a single course
Order web-based training ePasses by calling 440-646-3434 (Option 4)
or by contacting your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor.
32
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:16 PM
Page 33
Safety
Safety
05_Safety
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:14 PM
Page 8
Safety Curriculum Map
GuardLogix
Application
Development
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
Project Development
CCP143
4 Days
SAF-LOG101
2 Days
Program and Design
GuardLogix
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Maintain
SAF-LOG102
Understand
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
CCP146
Elective Course
34
2 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Machine Safety
Seminar
SAF-SEM
Understand
1 Day
2 Days
GuardPLC 1600/1800
Controller Systems
Fundamentals
SAF-PLC101
Maintain
1 Day
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:14 PM
Page 9
Industrial Safety Courses
Refer to the Industrial, Quality, and Management section of the catalog for course descriptions.
Lock-out/Tag-out Implementation
SAF-SFT100
GuardPLC 1600/1800
Controller Systems
Programming
SAF-PLC103
SAF-SFT112
Electrical Safety Awareness
SAF-SFT101
Lock-out/Tag-out Implementation
and Arc Flash Awareness
SAF-SFT117
1 Day
NFPA 70E – Arc Flash Awareness
SAF-SFT106
SAF-SFT110
GuardPLC 1600/1800
Controller Systems
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
1 Day
Plant Floor Arc Flash/LOTO/
Confined Space Entry
SAF-SFT123
Confined Space Entry Awareness
SAF-PLC102
NFPA 70E – Electrical Safety and
Arc Flash Compliance
Industrial Hoist and Rigging
Fundamentals
MFG243
2030 ElectroGuard
Safety Isolation System
Authorized
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
SAF-ELE102-LD
2 Days
2030 ElectroGuard
Safety Isolation System
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Fundamentals
SAF-ELE101-LD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
1 Day
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
35
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:17 PM
Page 36
RSLogix™ 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix® System Fundamentals
CCP146
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a solid fundamental knowledge of Logix5000™ systems and terminology. Students will be
introduced to Logix5000 system components and functionality and will have an opportunity to use RSLogix 5000 software to perform basic system networking and
configuration tasks.
Safety
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify Logix5000 system components
• Create and modify an RSLogix 5000 project
• Transfer a project file to a Logix5000 controller
• Configure local 1756- I/O modules
• Communicate with a Logix5000 controller
• Create tags and monitor data in an RSLogix 5000 project
• Draft basic ladder logic for an RSLogix 5000 routine
• Select basic ladder logic instruments for an RSLogix 5000 routine
• Enter ladder logic components in an RSLogix 5000 routine
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who have little or no working experience with Logix5000 systems
or other programmable controllers
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
Job Aids Included
Logix5000 Systems Glossary
RSLogix5000 and Logix5000 Fundamentals
Procedure Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ53
SAF-SEM
Machine Safety Seminar
2 Days
Course Purpose
This seminar provides students with the foundation to better understand current safety regulations. Students should learn how to review and recommend changes or
improvements to existing machine safeguards. Students should also learn how to reduce risk with machine safeguarding systems based on safety standards and risk
assessment. Students will also be presented with strategies to reduce safety issues that interfere with their machine uptime. In addition, students should understand
how to ensure their machine safeguarding will pass the next OSHA inspection.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify the building blocks to a successful machine safety program, as well as
OSHA requirements and insights to compliance
• List key points of ANSI machine tool standards
• Employ basic risk assessment methodology
• Understand safety circuit design in compliance with ANSI and NFPA standards
including circuit reliability levels
• Apply general application knowledge relating to safeguarding of devices
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• need to better understand the current safety regulations
• are being asked to review and recommend changes or improvements to
existing machine safeguards
• want to learn how to reduce risk with machine safeguarding systems based on
safety standards and risk assessment
• have machine uptime affected by safety issues
• are responsible for ensuring your machine safeguarding will pass the next
OSHA inspection
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course, but basic experience in a plant
environment is recommended.
36
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:17 PM
Page 37
GuardPLC™ 1600/1800 Controller
Systems Fundamentals
SAF-PLC101
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a fundamental knowledge of GuardPLC 1600/1800 systems and RSLogix Guard PLUS
software. Students will be introduced to GuardPLC safety standards, functionality and controller circuitry, controller components, and distributed I/O modules. Students
will have hands-on opportunities to use RSLogix Guard PLUS software to establish communications with a controller. This course provides students with the resources
and hands-on practice required to download a project to a GuardPLC 1600 controller and start a routine.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who have no or little experience using GuardPLC 1600/1800
controllers
Difficulty Level
Safety
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand the safety principles of a GuardPLC system
• Understand the functionality of a GuardPLC system
• Identify GuardPLC 1600/1800 system components
• Get started with RSLogix Guard PLUS software
• Configure communications for a GuardPLC 1600/1800 controller
• Download and start the RSLogix Guard PLUS project
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
Job Aids Included
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide
GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD
2030 ElectroGuard® Safety Isolation System
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Fundamentals
Catalog #
ABT-1753-TSJ50
ABT-1753-DRG70
SAF-ELE101-LD
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course will help provide students with the fundamental skills needed to operate, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System. The
instructor will describe and demonstrate basic system functionality and procedures for checkout, troubleshooting, and preventive maintenance. Students will then
practice these procedures using ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System modules. Highlights of this course include working on an ElectroGuard system equipped with
expansion, communication, and pneumatic isolation modules.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Overview of ElectroGuard modules, including power panel, control module,
expansion module, remote lockout station, pneumatic isolation module
• Perform system checkout
• Troubleshoot an ElectroGuard system
• Interpret the status indicator lights
• Replace ElectroGuard modules
• Create a service log
• Perform preventive maintenance
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard Safety
Isolation System
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Ability to perform lockout/tagout procedures
• Experience using a multimeter and reading an electrical schematic
• Ability to interpret an electrical schematic
Job Aids Included
Schematic Print Collection
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
37
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:17 PM
Page 38
SAF-LOG102
GuardLogix® Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational GuardLogix system. Students will
be introduced to GuardLogix system hardware and software components, functionality, terminology, and safety standards. Students will also gain experience
interpreting safety instructions using RSLogix 5000 software. In addition, students will have hands-on opportunities to troubleshoot GuardLogix system components
and safety CompactBlock™ I/O modules.
Safety
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify GuardLogix project components
• Identify GuardLogix safety signatures and safety lock/unlock states
• Identify I/O tags in a GuardLogix system
• Monitor GuardLogix tag values
• Search and print GuardLogix project components
• Troubleshoot and replace GuardLogix system components
• Troubleshoot and replace safety CompactBlock I/O modules
• Interpret safety instructions in a GuardLogix project
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to monitor and troubleshoot RSLogix 5000 projects for
GuardLogix controllers
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix Systems Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software
• General experience with industrial controls
Job Aids Included
GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Catalog #
ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
SAF-PLC102
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently maintain an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and troubleshoot a GuardPLC
controller. It builds upon students’ fundamental knowledge of common controller terms and operation, and students’ ability to save, compile code, and download a
project. This course adds to students’ skill sets by introducing new tasks, such as creating and connecting signals, modifying a function block program, and
troubleshooting problems with the controller. Students will also learn offline and online monitoring, testing of a routine, forcing project signals, and configuring and
exporting diagnostic logs for locating errors and simulating test conditions that do not occur in normal operation.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Modify and download an RSLogix Guard PLUS project
• Configure and export GuardPLC diagnostic logs
• Troubleshoot GuardPLC 1600/1800 controller errors
• Monitor and test an RSLogix Guard PLUS routine
• Force an RSLogix Guard PLUS project signal
• Archive and restore an RSLogix Guard PLUS project
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to maintain RSLogix Guard PLUS projects
• Troubleshoot GuardPLC controllers
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
course (SAF-PLC101)
• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
Job Aids Included
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC
Procedures Guide
GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD
38
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1753-TSJ50
ABT-1753-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:18 PM
Page 39
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System
Authorized Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
SAF-ELE102-LD
2 Days
Safety
Course Purpose
This course will help provide students with the skills and authorization level needed to maintain and troubleshoot the factory-sealed modules of a Bulletin 2030
ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System. The instructor will describe and demonstrate procedures for module checkout, troubleshooting, and preventative maintenance.
Highlights of this course include working on an ElectroGuard system equipped with expansion, communication, and pneumatic isolation modules. This course will also
provide students with opportunities to practice troubleshooting module faults.
Course Objectives
Who Should Attend?
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks: Individuals who:
• Perform module checkout
• Need to maintain and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard System
• Break the factory seal of an ElectroGuard module
• Require authorization to repair sealed modules
• Troubleshoot within the module
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
• Interpret status indicator lights
• Replace the module seal
Prerequisites
• Create a service log
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Perform preventive maintenance
• Ability to perform lockout/tagout procedures
• Troubleshoot an ElectroGuard system to the component level
• Experience using a multimeter
• Ability to interpret an electrical schematic
• Completion of the 2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System Maintenance
and Troubleshooting Fundamentals course (SAF-ELE101-LD) or equivalent
experience
Job Aids Included
Schematic Print Collection
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
Project Development
CCP143
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
Given a functional specification for a Logix5000 application, students will be able to develop a project during the course to meet the specification requirements. This
course covers tasks common to all controllers that use the Logix5000 control engine or operating system, including ControlLogix, FlexLogix™, CompactLogix™, SoftLogix™,
and DriveLogix™ controllers. This course instructs students on project development tasks, including organizing a project, organizing data, and configuring modules
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Communicate with a controller
• Create and organize a new project
• Enter, edit, and verify ladder logic
• Communicate with a Logix5000 controller and remote I/O module
• Configure a controller to share produce and consume data
• Create a periodic and event task
• Retrieve and set controller status values with GSV/SSV instructions
• Document, search, and manage project files
• Allocate connections
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to develop projects for Logix5000 applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming
course (CCP151) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
39
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:18 PM
Page 40
SAF-LOG101
GuardLogix Application Development
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop knowledge of GuardLogix systems. Students will be introduced to GuardLogix system
hardware and software components, functionality, terminology, and safety standards. Students will also gain experience programming safety instructions using
RSLogix 5000 software. Hands-on opportunities are provided to configure CompactBlock I/O safety modules. Students will also use RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet™
software to map CompactBlock I/O safety data. Also, students will gain experience sending safety data over an EtherNet/IP network using producer and consumer
technology. In addition, students will learn how to lock a GuardLogix controller to protect safety control components from modification.
Safety
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify GuardLogix system hardware components
• Create a new GuardLogix project using RSLogix 5000 software
• Configure CompactBlock I/O safety modules for a GuardLogix project using
RSLogix 5000 software
• Get CompactBlock Guard I/O point status information via explicit messaging
using RSLogix 5000 software
• Program RSLogix 5000 ladder logic within a GuardLogix safety task
• Configure a GuardLogix controller to produce and consume safety data
over EtherNet/IP
• Configure GuardLogix controller safety option
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to develop RSLogix 5000 projects for GuardLogix controllers
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
• General experience with industrial controls
Job Aids Included
GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems
Programming
Catalog #
ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
SAF-PLC103
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to effectively program an RSLogix Guard PLUS project for GuardPLC controller
communications with other devices, such as an OPC server and another controller. This course adds to students’ skill set by introducing new tasks, such as creating
user-defined function blocks, configuring a distributed I/O module, and configuring OPC and peer-to-peer communications. Students will also learn how to configure
user accounts for restricting access to windows of an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and for performing certain tasks on a GuardPLC controller.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create an RSLogix Guard PLUS function block routine
• Configure a GuardPLC distributed I/O module
• Create RSLogix Guard PLUS project user accounts
• Configure a GuardPLC OPC server
• Configure GuardPLC peer-to-peer communications
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to program an RSLogix Guard PLUS project
• Configure a GuardPLC controller to communicate with other devices
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
course (SAF-PLC101)
• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Maintenance
and Troubleshooting course (SAF-PLC102)
• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
Job Aids Included
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide
GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD
40
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1753-TSJ50
ABT-1753-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:18 PM
Page 41
Bring Training to Your Organization with On-Site Training Services!
Receive these benefits with standard, on-site training:
• Flexible location - At your facility, in your training
center, on the plant floor.
• Flexible schedule - Any date, time, or shift that
works best for your employees.
• Free pre- and post-tests that measure your
employees’ knowledge gain and demonstrate the
value of Rockwell Automation training solutions.
• Dedicated instructor emphasizing hands-on,
job-related training relevant to your employees’
needs.
• Training content adjusted according to employee
skill levels.
• Training cost savings - No travel expenses.
• Standardized training - Employees attend the same
training and learn the same information.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Safety
Rockwell Automation on-site training can work in a
typical classroom environment or on the plant floor.
To start your on-site training program,
call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or contact
your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
41
05_Safety
5/6/2010
1:18 PM
Page 42
Safety
42
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:48 PM
Page 43
Networks
Networks
06_Networks
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:15 PM
Page 10
Networks Curriculum Map
ControlNet and
RSNetWorx
Design and
Configuration
Program and Design
CCP170
2 Days
DeviceNet and
RSNetWorx
Configuration and
Troubleshooting
CCP164
EtherNet/IP
Design and
Troubleshooting
CCP178
3 Days
ControlNet and
RSNetWorx
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Maintain
CCP172
Understand
44
2 Days
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
CIA101
Elective Course
3 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
2 Days
Understand
Maintain
Program and
Design
Program and Design
and Maintain
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
Data Highway/Ethernet
Peer-to-Peer
Communications
CCP310-LD
4.5 Days
4/26/2010
2:15 PM
Page 11
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications on
ControlNet
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications on
DeviceNet
CCA162
CCA164
1 Day
2 Days
Related e-Learning Products
NetLinx
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP177
4 Days
SLC 500 and PLC-5
Communications
CCPS65
EtherNet/IP Bundle
9393-ENETAENE
(9393-ENETAENF)
RSTrainer for
EtherNet/IP-Hardware
and IP Addressing
RSTrainer
for EtherNet/IPCommunications
and Diagnostics
RSTrainer for
RSLinx Software
9393-RSTENET1ENE
(9393-RSTENET1ENF)
9393-RSTENET2ENE
(9393-RSTENET2ENF)
9393-RSTLINX
(9393-RSTLINXENF)
EtherNet/IP-Hardware
and IP Addressing
EtherNet/IPCommunications
and Diagnostics
1 Day
Web-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
45
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 46
Introduction to Automation and
the Integrated Architecture™ System
CIA101
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about
and interact with a variety of automation hardware. They will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration
tasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and human-machine interface (HMI) products
function together within the Integrated Architecture System.
Networks
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Program a basic RSLogix™ 5000 project for an integrated system
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
• Understand Logix5000™ multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the
Integrated Architecture System
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
CCPS65
SLC™ 500 and PLC-5® Communications
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx® software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure
and manage various communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix™ 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, students
will learn how to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a Data Highway Plus™ (DH+™) communications and serial driver in
RSLinx software
• Navigate RSLinx software
• Download and upload a project
• Go online to an SLC™ 500 or PLC-5® processor
• Change the processor operating mode
• Determine available system resources on RSLinx software
• Apply diagnostic tools and utilities
• Configure client application communications
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and
troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5
software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
46
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1747-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 47
CCP178
EtherNet/IP Design and Troubleshooting
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.1
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course prepares students to successfully design and configure an efficient EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) network by managing both the bandwidth requirements
for a project and the number of connections on the network. Students will configure a Stratix 6000 switch for viewing and controlling network traffic, restricting traffic
overload, and protecting against unauthorized device access. This course also prepares students to effectively resolve the breakdown in communications between a
controller and the devices it is controlling. Students will troubleshoot EtherNet/IP network media components and use web-based technologies imbedded within multiple
EtherNet/IP devices to monitor the health and status of the EtherNet/IP network.
NetLinx Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for designing and configuring a new EtherNet/IP network or
modifying and troubleshooting an existing EtherNet/IP network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming course (CCP151)
and/or RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143) or
equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software
Job Aids Included
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
Networks
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Design an EtherNet/IP cable system and optimize an EtherNet/IP network
• Ping a module’s EtherNet/IP address
• Configure and modify EtherNet/IP addresses using RSLinx® software,
RSLogix™ 5000 software, and BOOTP-DHCP Server© Software
• Establish EtherNet/IP connections to remote devices
• Produce and consume data over an Ethernet/IP network
• Communicate between multiple controllers on an Ethernet/IP network using a
message instruction
• Configure the Stratix 6000 Ethernet switch
• Troubleshoot EtherNet/IP network media components
• Monitor an EtherNet/IP network using web-enabled technologies
Catalog #
ABT-N300-TSJ50
ABT-N300-DRG70
CCP177
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4 Days
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This course is designed to provide students with the necessary skills to effectively maintain and troubleshoot DeviceNet™, ControlNet™, and EtherNet/IP hardware and
software. Students will build their skills by using troubleshooting best practices and network troubleshooting tools; gain experience troubleshooting DeviceNet,
ControlNet, and EtherNet/IP networks by maintaining connectivity to the networks; and learn a variety of software packages and hardware indicators to ensure that the
Logix5000™ controllers and devices on the networks maintain communications to sustain optimal performance.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify DeviceNet network components and an EtherNet/IP cable system
• Design a DeviceNet cable system and create a DeviceNet network
configuration
• Map inputs and outputs to a 1756-DNB scanner module on a DeviceNet
network
• Troubleshoot a DeviceNet network, duplicate node addresses, and a
ControlNet media system
• Isolate faulty ControlNet media using signal measurement equipment
• Configure and modify EtherNet/IP addresses using RSLinx software
• Troubleshoot EtherNet/IP network media components and device configurations
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
(CCP146) course or equivalent experience
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting existing
DeviceNet, ControlNet, and EtherNet/IP networks
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Job Aids Included
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-N200-TSJ20
ABT-N200-TSJ50
ABT-N200-DRG70
ABT-N100-TSJ20
ABT-N100-TSJ50
ABT-N100-DRG70
ABT-N300-TSJ50
ABT-N300-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
47
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 48
ControlNet and RSNetWorx™ Design
and Configuration
CCP170
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills necessary to efficiently design and configure ControlNet and RSNetWorx™-capable hardware and software into an effective
control network. Students gain these skills from the ground up, practicing each step in the design and configuration process from choosing the correct cable to configuring
the connections that will transmit data across that cable. After completing this course, students will have designed a ControlNet and RSNetWorx media system, configured
ControlNet and RSNetWorx hardware to behave as a deterministic and repeatable control network, and configured data connections between devices that transmit data.
Networks
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Design a ControlNet and RSNetWorx media system
• Configure a ControlNet and RSNetWorx network offline
• Go online to a ControlNet and RSNetWorx network
• Enter scheduled ControlNet and RSNetWorx I/O data connections for
PLC-5 processors
• Enter ControlNet and RSNetWorx messages for PLC-5 processors
• Enter scheduled ControlNet and RSNetWorx I/O data connections for
Logix 5000 controllers
• Enter ControlNet and RSNetWorx messages for Logix 5000 controllers
Job Aids Included
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-N200-TSJ50
ABT-N200-DRG70
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx
Configuration and Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for designing and configuring a new ControlNet and
RSNetWorx network
• Are managing and modifying an existing ControlNet and RSNetWorx network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Ability to program ladder logic using RSLogix 5, 500, or 5000 software
CCP164
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.1
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course prepares students to successfully design and configure an efficient DeviceNet network using components for the ControlLogix platform. To meet this objective,
students begin by designing a cable system, and then configure a driver, a scanner module, and network devices. This course also prepares students to troubleshoot a
malfunctioning DeviceNet network and return it to normal operation with minimum downtime. Students will first verify proper network installation and then perform both
hardware and software-based tasks used to isolate DeviceNet problems, as well as practice the tasks necessary to add and replace network devices.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify network components and design a DeviceNet cable system
• Create a DeviceNet network configuration
• Commission nodes on a DeviceNet network
• Configure a 1756-DNB DeviceNet scanner module
• Map inputs and outputs on a DeviceNet network
• Manage DeviceNet EDS files
• Configure Automatic Device Recovery (ADR) on a DeviceNet network
• Communicate on a DeviceNet network using explicit messaging
• Modify a DeviceNet network configuration
• Troubleshoot a network using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
• Troubleshoot a network using hardware indicators
• Troubleshoot a network using RSLogix 5000 software
• Troubleshoot duplicate node addresses on a DeviceNet network
• Restoring a malfunctioning DeviceNet network to normal operation
48
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for designing and configuring a new DeviceNet network
• Are responsible for isolating and correcting problems or performing basic
maintenance on a DeviceNet network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites:
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146), or
• Knowledge of common ControlLogix terminology and the ability to program and
interpret basic ladder logic instructions in RSLogix 5000 software
Job Aids Included
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-N100-TSJ20
ABT-N100-TSJ50
ABT-N100-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 49
CCP310-LD
Data Highway/Ethernet
Peer-to-Peer Communications
4.5 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with an overall systems approach of how Data Highway Plus™ (DH+™) and Ethernet networks relate to both programmable controllers
and computers. General network architectures are discussed along with system interconnections, cabling, and installation. The structure of communications protocols,
such as token passing, polling, and carrier-sense, multiple access, collision detection, is covered. In addition, hands-on excercises include bridge modules, gateways,
routers, and 10Base-T Ethernet hubs and transceivers.
PowerFlex® 700 Vector Control
Communications on DeviceNet
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for specifying, installing, programming, or
planning PLC-5, SLC-500, or ControlLogix peer-to-peer communications over
DH+ or Ethernet networks
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the PLC-5 Programming course (CCP410)
• Completion of the SLC-500 Programming course (CCPS41)
• Completion of the ControlLogix Project Development course (CCP143)
Networks
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• DH+ and Ethernet topologies
• Token passing protocol
• Channel diagnostics
• PLC-5 channel buffers
• PC-PLC-5 communications
• PLC-5-to-PLC-5 remote communications
• Ethernet protocols
• PLC-5, SLC-5/05, and ControlLogix CIP Ethernet messages
• SLC-5/04 and ControlLogix DH+ messages
CCA162
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive to
communicate on an existing DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, students will learn how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform tasks, such
as browsing the network, commissioning the PowerFlex 700 node, and configuring drive parameters. The students will also learn scanner module configuration and
input and output mapping. Students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700 standard control
drive and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Connect a drive to a DeviceNet network
• Commission a node on a DeviceNet network
• Configure drive and adapter parameters using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
• Manage DeviceNet EDS files for the drive
• Configure a DeviceNet scanner module to communicate with a drive
• Map drive inputs and outputs on a DeviceNet network
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for configuring PowerFlex 700 vector control
drives to communicate on a DeviceNet network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course
(CCA101) or equivalent experience
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-N100-TSJ50
ABT-20AB-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
49
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 50
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Communications on ControlNet
CCA164
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully starting up a PowerFlex 700 AC drive and commissioning it
on a ControlNet network. Students will learn how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters and install and commission a ControlNet communications adapter
and learn to configure a ControlNet network and create network connections for Logix5000 controllers.
Networks
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters using the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer™
software, and DriveExecutive™ software
• Configure drive parameters using DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software
• Upload and download PowerFlex 700 drive data
• Start up a PowerFlex 700 drive
• Install and configure a PowerFlex 700 drive ControlNet communications adapter
• Configure an offline ControlNet network
• Enter scheduled ControlNet I/O data connections for Logix5000 controllers
• Enter ControlNet messages for Logix5000 controllers
• Control PowerFlex 700 drive operation
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up
PowerFlex 700 drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Quick Reference Guide
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-20AB-DRG70
ABT-20AB-TQR90
ABT-N200-TSJ50
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Window environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101) or equivalent experience
ControlNet and RSNetWorx
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP172
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
Hands-on practice is an integral part of learning and this course offers hands-on opportunities to effectively troubleshoot ControlNet and RSNetWorx hardware and
software. Students will be introduced to a logical process for troubleshooting ControlNet and RSNetWorx components and identifying problems with communications
cards, cabling, and other network hardware. Using network software and a workstation containing real and simulated hardware components, students will practice
isolating network malfunctions, reading diagnostics, and correcting configuration errors. This experience can then be directly applied to students’ ControlNet applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Troubleshoot a ControlNet and RSNetWorx media system
• Isolate faulty ControlNet and RSNetWorx media using signal
measuring equipment
• Isolate ControlNet and RSNetWorx network malfunctions using LEDs and
mnemonic displays
• Connect to a ControlNet and RSNetWorx network using RSLinx software
• Troubleshoot using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software
• Troubleshoot a scheduled ControlNet data connection for Logix 5000 controllers
• Troubleshoot a scheduled ControlNet data connection for PLC-5 processors
50
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for maintaining an existing ControlNet and
RSNetWorx network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience using programming software (RSLogix 5, 500, or 5000) is
helpful, but not required
Job Aids Included
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
ControlNet Coax Tool Kit
Catalog #
ABT-N200-TSJ50
ABT-N200-TSJ20
ABT-N200-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 51
Training Services
Webinars – Instructor-Led and Web-Delivered
Networks
Benefits
Real-time e-learning has been proven to help
organizations increase employee knowledge,
skills, and productivity while eliminating travel
costs. Ask us about refresher training for newly
learned skills or consider a custom webinar
based on your specific requirements, i.e.,
troubleshooting techniques, modular
programming, etc. Each of these types of
webinars provides targeted learning
opportunities for your employees.
Rockwell Automation Webinars are short easily scheduled events taught
by a live instructor using the latest web-delivered, interactive, training
technology. Even if you cannot attend the training live, you will be able to
tune in anytime after the event to view a recorded session.
Our online classrooms are conducted by a knowledgeable instructor via
the Internet. More than a seminar or simple lecture, these sessions on our
technologies and products provide the following engaging features that
enhance a students learning experience:
•
•
•
•
Blended presentation and demonstration formats
Dynamic question and answer sessions
Group polls with instantly displayed results
Desktop sharing or ability for students to take over the control of the
instructor’s automation software
• Playback option for future refresher training
For more information
You can obtain more information on Rockwell Automation Webinars by
calling 440-646-3434 (select option #4), or by contacting your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales office.
For questions and comments, please email
[email protected]
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
51
06_Networks
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 52
Personal Trainer
Create automation expertise with one-on-one training
Networks
Benefits
• Access to an automation expert
• Job-relevant training adjusted according
to the individual’s needs and skill levels
• Documented best practices to
minimize production errors
• Increased employee competency through
extensive training, hands-on practice and
experience with your installed equipment,
systems and applications
• Reduced training expenses associated
with off-site training
• Flexible schedule – daily and weekly
options available
This highly-focused, on-the-job training lays the foundation for successful
skill and knowledge transfer. Use the Personal Trainer to provide in-depth
technical experience or to mentor newly hired employees.
The Personal Trainer is an experienced Rockwell Automation instructor
and technical expert who develops and implements an individualized
training plan for one to two individuals on-site at your facility. The Personal
Trainer mentors the individual(s) throughout the hands-on experience to
improve skills and knowledge.
Training Deliverables
• A dedicated on-site instructor for one-on-one or two-on-one training
for a pre-determined time period
• Training materials to facilitate learning and knowledge transfer
• Hands-on activity and experience performing job tasks with
installed equipment
• Identification and implementation of best practices including
troubleshooting and/or programming techniques that use
critical-thinking skills and job aids
• Improved confidence in job skills as a result of the training occurring in
the real-world environment
Automation Expertise
Software/Hardware
• Installation and configuration
• “Quick Start” assistance
• Communication setup
• Reporting
Integrated Architecture
• Integration
• Communication setup
• Programming languages and power
programming techniques
Legacy Products
• Migration paths
• Configuration
• Communications
Application
• Various uses and integration of
Rockwell Automation products
• Conversions
For more information
Contact your local authorized Allen-Bradley distributor,
Rockwell Automation sales office, or call 1.440.646.3434 (select option #4).
Catalog #: PTRAINER
52
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:49 PM
Page 53
Visualization
Visualization
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:16 PM
Page 12
Visualization Curriculum Map
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus
Programming
FactoryTalk View SE
Architecture
(formerly RSView SE)
(formerly RSView ME)
CCV204
CCV205-LD
4 Days
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus
Conversions
Program and Design
2 Days
FactoryTalk View SE
Programming
(formerly RSView SE)
(formerly RSView ME)
CCV202
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Maintain
CCV209
Understand
54
4.5 Days
FactoryTalk View SE
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
(formerly RSView SE)
2 Days
CCV206-LD
2 Days
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
CIA101
Elective Course
CCV207
1 Day
2 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Understand
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:16 PM
Page 13
PanelView 300/550/
600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder32
Application Development
CCP196
2 Days
RSView32
Project Development
CCV201
4.5 Days
Related e-Learning Products
RSView32
Project Maintenance
CCP200
4 Days
PLC-5/SLC 500
and RSLogix
Fundamentals
CCP122
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View ME
Software Bundle
9393-RSTVMEALL
(9393-RSTMEALLENF)
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View ME
SoftwareApplications & Displays
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View ME
SoftwareDrawing Objects
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View ME
SoftwareInteractive Objects
9393-RSTVMEPT1
(9393-RSTMEPT1ENF)
9393-RSTVMEPT2
(9393-RSTMEPT2ENF)
9393-RSTVMEPT3
(9393-RSTMEPT3ENF)
RSView ME SoftwareApplications & Displays
RSView ME SoftwareDrawing Objects
RSView ME SoftwareInteractive Objects
2 Days
Computer-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
Web-Based Training –
Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
55
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:50 PM
Page 56
Introduction to Automation and
the Integrated Architecture™ System
CIA101
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
Course Purpose
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about
and interact with a variety of automation hardware. Students will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration
tasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and HMI products function together within the
Integrated Architecture System.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Program a basic RSLogix™ 5000 project for an integrated system
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
• Understand Logix5000™ multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the
Integrated Architecture System
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
Visualization
RSView®32 Project Maintenance
CCP200
4 Days
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.8
Course Purpose
This course is designed to provide students with the skills needed to maintain and modify an RSView32 human-machine interface (HMI) automation project used
to control and monitor an operation. Students will use RSView32 software to practice the tasks associated with maintaining an existing RSView32 project by
modifying functionality and features.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure direct driver, DDE, and OPC communications
• Modify the tag database and a tag monitor
• Create and modify graphic displays and objects
• Configure and run activity log files
• Configure trends, security, and startup settings
• Create macros and symbols
• Configure and run alarms
• Modify and run derived tag and parameter files
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to maintain and modify an existing RSView32 project
• Need to control and monitor an operation using RSView32 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the PLC-5®/SLC™ 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or the RSLogix 5000 Level l: ControlLogix® System Fundamentals
course (CCP146)
Job Aids Included
RSView32 Procedures Guide
56
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-9301-TSJ50
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:50 PM
Page 57
FactoryTalk® View SE Maintenance
and Troubleshooting (formerly RSView SE)
CCV206-LD
®
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a maintenance and troubleshooting course that provides maintainers with a basic understanding of FactoryTalk® View Site Edition (SE). This course
provides the resources and hands-on practice required to understand the basic structure of a FactoryTalk View SE stand-alone or distributed application. Students will
have an opportunity to navigate through FactoryTalk View SE software to learn to efficiently troubleshoot an application or system. Students will be introduced to
topics such as system communications, data and diagnostics logging, trending, and redundancy.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little or no practical experience with FactoryTalk View SE
• Need to know how to interpret and maintain a FactoryTalk View SE application
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Job Aids Included
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
PanelView™ 300/550/600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder™32 Application Development
Catalog #
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
Visualization
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand the architecture of stand-alone and distributed FactoryTalk
View SE applications
• Explore communications using direct referencing of OPC topics and HMI tags
• View HMI tags in alarm log files and an alarm summary object
• Configure FactoryTalk diagnostics logging and data logging
• Analyze trends to show real-time and historical data
• Utilize HMI server and data server redundancy
CCP196
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course prepares students to successfully design and configure a control panel application for a PanelView standard terminal that is used to control and monitor
an operation. Students will first use PanelBuilder32 software to practice the tasks associated with creating the operator interface screens, then they will demonstrate
proper operation of the screens by interacting with the terminal and the processor.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Prepare a standard PanelView terminal for operation
• Connect communications cables
• Create an application, a tag database, and background text
• Define network communication parameters
• Download an application
• Create control objects and displays
• Create messages and reports
• Add bitmap graphic images
• Troubleshoot a PanelView standard terminal and a PowerBuilder32 application
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to create a PanelBuilder32 application
• Need to control and monitor an operation using a PanelView standard terminal
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder32 Procedures Guide
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-2711-TSJ50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
57
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:50 PM
Page 58
CCV201
RSView32 Project Development
CEUs 3.2
4.5 Days
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
Course Purpose
This course teaches students the skills needed to create an RSView32 human-machine interface (HMI) automation project used to control and monitor an operation.
Students will learn how RSView32 software provides interoperability with other Rockwell Software products, Microsoft products, and third-party offerings. Students will
create a basic HMI/MMI that incorporates the vast array of powerful tools that RSView32 software offers.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create RSView32 projects, derived tag & event files, ActiveX objects, and
graphic displays
• Configure direct driver communications, OPC/DDE communications, trends &
pens, and security
• Create and monitor tags, alarms, and activities
• Create and run parameter files, macros, and symbols
• Configure and run data log models
• Add animation to graphic displays
• Create RAD server, client connections, key definition control, and OLE objects
• Enter and run VBA code
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to create an RSView32 project to control
• Need to monitor an operation using RSView32 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience.
Visualization
Job Aids Included
RSView32 Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-9301-TSJ50
CCV207
FactoryTalk View SE Programming
(formerly RSView SE)
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
Course Purpose
This course will aid students in developing FactoryTalk View Site Edition (SE) applications. All aspects of the FactoryTalk View SE software are presented,
followed by interactive hands-on lab assignments emphasizing application of the concepts in an industrial setting. Students will have the opportunity to create
an application and build graphic displays. Students will also work with RSLinx® Enterprise communications software and the FactoryTalk diagnostics system.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure RSLinx enterprise drivers
• Configure direct referencing of data points and OPC browsing
• Create a stand-alone SE application
• Use graphic displays and global objects
• Configure security and alarms
• Create and configure a trend
• Use macros, symbols, and keys
• Add VBA display code
58
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to develop FactoryTalk View SE local applications
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Job Aids Included
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:50 PM
Page 59
CCV205-LD
FactoryTalk View SE Architecture
(formerly RSView SE)
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course will allow students to successfully deploy a finished FactoryTalk View SE distributed application. Building on students' knowledge of HMI (human-machine
interface) application development and their experience with operating these systems, this course covers Windows networking basics, FactoryTalk View SE distributed
application architecture guidelines, deployment of components for a distributed application, and troubleshooting.
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Conversions (formerly RSView ME)
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to move a distributed FactoryTalk View SE application from
an engineering environment to the plant floor
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Familiarity with Windows 2003 Server and Windows networking concepts
• Completion of the FactoryTalk View SE Programming course (CCV207)
• Previous experience working with FactoryTalk View SE software or similar
HMI/SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) products
Visualization
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create local users and groups
• Apply domain/group policy
• Create organizational units
• Develop design principles and guidelines
• Configure FactoryTalk security
• Install and deploy a distributed FactoryTalk View SE application
• Use terminal services to view remote FactoryTalk View SE clients
• Apply FactoryTalk View SE troubleshooting tools and tips
CCV202
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with the skills necessary to convert existing PanelView applications to the next generation PanelView Plus
terminals. At the completion of this course, students will have the knowledge and skills required to attend other Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Machine Edition
(ME) courses. Students will also gain skills required to prepare a PanelView Plus terminal for operation. Students will become familiar with FactoryTalk View ME and
RSLinx Enterprise software as well.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Convert a PanelView application using FactoryTalk View ME
• Configure communication using FactoryTalk View ME
• Configure and view diagnostics for an application
• Download a FactoryTalk View ME application to a PanelView Plus terminal
• Update FactoryTalk View ME displays
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to convert existing PanelView applications to FactoryTalk
View ME applications for use on a PanelView Plus terminal
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience using HMI products
Job Aids Included
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
59
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:50 PM
Page 60
CCV204
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Programming (formerly RSView ME)
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.8
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with the skills necessary to develop FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on the next
generation PanelView Plus terminals. This course provides opportunities to work with both the software and hardware. Students will gain the hands-on skills required to
prepare a PanelView Plus terminal for operation. Students will also work with FactoryTalk View ME software and RSLinx enterprise software and practice downloading
FactoryTalk View ME applications to a PanelView Plus terminal. The software skills gained in this course can also be applied to FactoryTalk ME applications that run
directly on a Windows computer or on a PanelView Plus CE industrial computer.
Visualization
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a PanelView Plus terminal, RSLinx enterprise communications,
FactoryTalk security, display security, recipes, language switching, and basic
animation for FactoryTalk View ME objects
• Create and customize a FactoryTalk View ME application
• Create and modify tags and graphic objects
• Create and manage FactoryTalk View ME runtime files
• Create and configure alarms, information messages, and interactive controls
• Create data logs and trends, tag placeholders and parameter files, macros and
global connections
• Add global objects
• Add and configure graphic displays
• Insert faceplates
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to create FactoryTalk View ME applications for use on a
PanelView Plus terminal
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Job Aids Included
FactoryTalk ME and PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Catalog #
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
CCV209
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Day
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills necessary to maintain and troubleshoot FactoryTalk View ME applications that run on the next-generation PanelView Plus
terminals. This course provides opportunities to work with both the software and hardware. During class, students will gain the hands-on skills required to prepare a
PanelView Plus terminal for operation. Students will also work with FactoryTalk View ME software and RSLinx Enterprise software and will practice downloading
FactoryTalk View ME applications to a PanelView Plus terminal.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a PanelView Plus terminal and RSLinx enterprise communications
• Create and modify tags
• Add and configure graphic displays
• Create and manipulate graphic objects
• Create and configure interactive controls and alarms
• Create and manage FactoryTalk View ME runtime files
• Troubleshoot job aid
60
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain FactoryTalk ME applications for use on a
PanelView Plus terminal
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Job Aids Included
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:51 PM
Page 61
SPECIAL OFFER
FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Bundle
Software and Training Together at Last!
Save on the FactoryTalk View ME Bundle
Take advantage of this new bundled offering of
the FactoryTalk View Studio and computer-based
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME software series
of courses. To order the bundle, use part number
9701-VWSTMTRGENE.
FactoryTalk View Studio Key Features
• Common development environment with consistent
operator interface and navigation features across
multiple platforms
• Easy-to-use configuration environment with rich
graphical animation
• Reusable HMI applications across multiple
machine-level projects without rework or
modifications
• Compatible with PanelView Plus, VersaView® CE
and VersaView terminals
• Full complement of operator devices and advanced
functions
• Support of both OPC (OLE for Process Control)
and ActiveX™ technologies
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software Key Features
• Basic principles and/or concepts of FactoryTalk
View ME software
• Descriptive and detailed technical explanations
• Step-by-step instructions using animated sequences
and interactive simulations
• Testing of skills and knowledge of the FactoryTalk
View ME software
• Additional reference materials including
embedded Adobe™ Acrobat PDF files of technical
documentation
This bundle contains the following software:
• FactoryTalk View Studio for ME Software
• RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software Applications and Displays
• RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software Drawing Objects
• RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software Interactive Objects
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
To order this bundle, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4)
or contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
61
Visualization
Combine the FactoryTalk View Studio for ME
(Machine Edition) software with our award-winning
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME software series
of courses and you have an exceptional set of tools.
This bundle is designed as an all-inclusive solution
to provide you with the software and the training
you need to be productive quickly.
07_Visualization
5/6/2010
1:51 PM
Page 62
Fundamentals Training + One
Attend a Rockwell Automation Fundamentals class
and receive a discount on your next training class!
Visualization
Fundamental Training + One is a great way to extend your
learning experience beyond just the basics and save money in the
process. Enroll in any Rockwell Automation Fundamentals class and
receive a discount on your second class.
After attending a Fundamentals class, you have thirty days to enroll
in a second class to receive the discount.
How to Enroll
To enroll in a Rockwell Automation training
class, contact your local Allen-Bradley
distributor, Rockwell Automation sales office,
or dial (440) 646-3434 (option #4) and
mention promotional code TAS0702.
This offer is not valid with other promotions.
Rockwell Automation will automatically reduce your second class
tuition by one less training voucher or equivalent list price value.
62
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
08_Motion Control
5/6/2010
1:53 PM
Page 63
Motion Control
Motion Control
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:16 PM
Page 14
Motion Control Curriculum Map
Program and Design
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Motion Programming
Using Ladder Logic
RSLogix 5000 Level 5:
Advanced Motion
Programming
CCN142
CCN190-LD
3 Days
Kinetix 6000 Level 4:
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Maintain
CCN200
Understand
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
CIA101
Elective Course
64
2 Days
2 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
2 Days
Motion Control
Fundamentals
CCN130
Understand
2 Days
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
Ultra3000
Programming
CCN191-LD
1 Day
4/26/2010
2:17 PM
Page 15
1394 and
GML Commander
Programming
CCN184
4.5 Days
1394 and
GML Commander
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCN183
4 Days
Related e-Learning Products
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000
Software - Motion
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
(9393-RSTLKMOTENF)
Computer-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
RSLogix 5000
Software - Motion
Web-Based Training –
Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
65
08_Motion Control
5/6/2010
1:53 PM
Page 66
Introduction to Automation and the
Integrated Architecture™ System
CIA101
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn about
and interact with a variety of automation hardware. Students will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration
tasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and HMI products function together within the
Integrated Architecture System.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Establish communications in an integrated system
• Program a basic RSLogix 5000 project for an integrated system
• Program with tag-based addressing in an integrated system
• Understand Logix5000™ multi-discipline control
• Understand NetLinx-enabled networks
• Understand the visualization development environment of an integrated system
• Understand HMI direct tag referencing in an integrated system
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have little or no working experience with automation systems
• Are interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation and the
Integrated Architecture System
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
CCN130
Motion Control Fundamentals
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Motion Control
Course Purpose
This course provides students with an overview of motion control concepts, terminology, functionality, and applications. In addition, students will also learn how
motion control applications function using the concepts and principles discussed in each lesson. An integrated practice at the end of the course provides students with
an opportunity to test their complete motion control skill set. This course allows students to establish the essential foundation needed to attend other courses in the
Motion Control curriculum.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify motion control system components and functions
• Apply basic motion control concepts
• Identify the components of a digital servo motion controller
• Identify the functionality of AC and DC servo motors and servo drives
• Identify the functionality of feedback devices and software servo loop
• Apply motion profiles
• Apply electronic gearing and camming profiles
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to learn basic motion control concepts for their job
• Need a prerequisite for attending other motion control courses
Difficulty Level
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course; however, a background in basic
electricity, electronics, and computer concepts is helpful.
Job Aids Included
Motion Control Glossary
66
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Beginner
Catalog #
ABT-M100-TSG10
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
08_Motion Control
5/6/2010
1:54 PM
Page 67
1394 and GML™ Commander
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCN183
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.8
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course is intended to provide experienced plant maintenance personnel with the skills required to return a malfunctioning 1394 GMC system to productive service
in the shortest time possible. Students will learn how to follow a deductive, reliable, and efficient diagnostic process to correct and clear hardware fault conditions on
a 1394 GMC system. This course also provides students with the necessary skills required to maintain communication interfaces between a 1394 GMC system and
other devices, including remote I/O, AxisLink, and DH-485 communications.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a 1394 GMC system with a
multi-axis motion application
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or
equivalent experience
• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or equivalent experience
• Experience with drives, feedback devices, open/closed-loop systems,
and position, velocity, and feedback loops
Job Aids Included
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide
1394 and GML Commander Troubleshooting Guide
Kinetix® 6000 Level 4: Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Catalog #
ABT-4100-TSJ51
ABT-1394-TSJ21
CCN200
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
Motion Control
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure serial communications
• Download and run a GML Commander diagram
• Monitor a system
• Identify system hardware and global faults
• Troubleshoot the system and axis module
• Troubleshoot a 1326 motor
• Troubleshoot EMI and Runtime faults
• Troubleshoot remote I/O, AxisLink, and DH-485 communications faults
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course provides students with skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system. Students will practice operating and troubleshooting the
system through hands-on exercises using RSLogix 5000 software. Students will also learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motion control system.
Students will practice identifying faults related to hardware and software by employing methods such as fault code tables, system LEDs, and other status indicators.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a
Kinetix 6000 system.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify Kinetix 6000 system components
• Connect a Kinetix 6000 servo system
• Interpret Kinetix 6000 system LEDs and status indicators
• Analyze fault codes in a Kinetix 6000 system
• Use fault routines in a Logix5000 SERCOS motion control application
• Interpret and monitor motion instructions in an RSLogix 5000 project
• Troubleshoot general Kinetix 6000 system problems and replace components
• Troubleshoot a basic RSLogix 5000 project on a Kinetix 6000 servo system
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control
Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6000 motion
control systems
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or
equivalent experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position
loop systems
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience with the ControlLogix platform and
basic ladder logix
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
67
08_Motion Control
5/6/2010
1:54 PM
Page 68
RSLogix™ 5000 Level 5:
Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality
using ladder logic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axis
motion control system while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharing
tasks between multiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Program motion using the coordinated move instruction
• Manually tune axes
• Perform an electronic cam function
• Program output cam instructions
• Programming motion event functions
• Using structured text
• Introduction to power programming
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control
Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Are already familiar with Logix5000 systems and general motion control
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using
Ladder Logic course (CCN142) or equivalent experience
• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks
CCN191-LD
Ultra™ 3000 Programming
1 Day
Motion Control
Course Purpose
This course will introduce students to Ultra 3000 digital servo drive capabilities, features, and benefits. Students will learn to understand Ultra 3000 model numbers
and how they relate to output power. Students will also learn the available I/O and the update times for the Ultra 3000 regulators. During this course, students will
learn how to wire an Ultra 3000 digital servo drive. They will also become familiar with the features and uses of Ultraware software and how it works in conjunction
with Ultra 3000 digital servo drives. In addition, students will learn how to configure an Ultra 3000 digital servo drive for SERCOS activation and how to activate the
SERCOS interface.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand Ultra 3000 specifications
• Understand Ultra 3000 wiring
• Use Ultraware software
• Configure an Ultra 3000 demo
• Use analog velocity mode
• Use position follower mode
• Use indexing mode
• Understand SERCOS
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to program Ultra 3000 digital servo drives
• Need to design or maintain an Ultra 3000 drive system
Difficulty Level
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or
equivalent experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position
loop systems
Job Aids Included
Motion Control Glossary
68
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Advanced
Catalog #
ABT-M100-TSG10
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
08_Motion Control
5/6/2010
1:54 PM
Page 69
CCN184
1394 and GML Commander
Programming
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills required to successfully configure and program a 1394 GMC system using GML Commander software. Students will
learn how to use GML Commander software to configure the hardware, monitor the system, establish communication interfaces, and develop basic and advanced
motion control diagrams for a specific application.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to configure and program a 1394 GMC system for a
multi-axis motion application
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamental course (CCN130) or
equivalent experience
• Experience in motion control applications and familiarity with drives,
feedback devices, and closed-loop systems
Job Aids Included
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion
Programming Using Ladder Logic
Catalog #
ABT-4100-TSJ51
CCN142
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
3 Days
CEUs 2.1
Motion Control
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure the system and axis and flex I/O modules
• Home, jog, and move the axes
• Manually tune the systems
• Configure the 1394 GMC system using DH-485, remote I/O, AxisLink, and
SLC processer communication networks
• Program motion
• Monitor the system using the tag window
• Create electronic camming and gearing routines
• Debug, test, and download a diagram
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality using ladder
logic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axis motion control
system while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharing tasks between
multiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure a Logix5000 system for motion control applications
• Configure SERCOS servo axes
• Test and tune axes
• Program a basic motion routine
• Program a fault routine
• Program an electronic gearing routine
• Program an electronic camming routine
• Program a virtual axis
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ52
ABT-1756-DRG70
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systems
• Are already familiar with Logix5000 systems and general motion control
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
69
08_Motion Control
5/6/2010
1:54 PM
Page 70
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software
®
Learn Any Time, Any Place and at Any Pace With Self-Paced Training
Is your goal to provide the best RSLogix 5000 Software
training as efficiently and cost-effectively as possible?
The RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 software is an
interactive series of computer-based training
courses that teaches you the core tasks required to
effectively program and troubleshoot an RSLogix 5000
project for use with any of the Logix5000 hardware
platforms, such as ControlLogix, CompactLogix,
FlexLogix, DriveLogix, and SoftLogix.
Save 18% when you order the RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5000 software bundle! Get the quality
training you need, when and where you need it,
and minimize both time away from the office and
travel costs.
Ordering Information
Motion Control
To order, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or contact
your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor and use the
following catalog numbers:
• RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Project Configuration
- 9393-RSTLX5KPRJ - (Standard)
- 9393-RSTLKPRJENF - (Enterprise Edition)
• RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Online Monitoring
- 9393-RSTLX5KON - (Standard)
- 9393-RSTLKONENF - (Enterprise Edition)
• RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Offline Programming
- 9393-RSTLX5KOFF - (Standard)
- 9393-RSTLKOFFENF - (Enterprise Edition)
• RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software - Motion
- 9393-RSTLX5KMOT - (Standard)
- 9393-RSTLKMOTENF - (Enterprise Edition)
• RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Bundle
(Includes all four titles)
- 9393-RSTLX5KALL - (Standard)
- 9393-RSTLKALLENF - (Enterprise Edition)
70
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Save Time and Money
Because the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 training
series can be used anywhere, it offers you greater
convenience and reduced cost for training delivery.
There are no travel expenses and no time away
from the workplace. Your learning is self-directed,
allowing you to choose the content most
appropriate to your interests, job responsibilities,
and skill level. RSTrainers are ideal for individuals
who:
• Prefer self-paced instruction
• Cannot attend classroom training because
their time is limited
• Need refresher RSLogix 5000 software training
• Want to learn the features and capabilities of
RSLogix 5000 software
• Need expertise in programming or
troubleshooting an RSLogix 5000 project
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
1:54 PM
Page 71
Drives
Drives
09_Drives
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:18 PM
Page 16
Drives Curriculum Map
Application-Specific Courses
CCA171-LD
Program
and Design
AutoMax
Programming
Fundamentals
RE0523
4 Days
AutoMax
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
RE0520
PowerFlex 400/70/700
AC Drive Field Start Up
for Water Wastewater
Applications
PowerFlex 400
AC Drive Field Start Up
for HVAC
Applications
4 Days
CCA174-LD
1 Day
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Configuration and
Startup
1 Day
CCA161
PowerFlex 700S
Phase ll Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PFX700S2-LD
3 Days
OR
2 Days
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications on
ControlNet
CCA164
2 Days
PowerFlex 755
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCA180
2 Days
Maintain
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCA163
1 Day
PowerFlex
DC Drive
Troubleshooting
CDD163
1 Day
On-Site
Only
Course
AC/DC Motors and
Drives Fundamentals
Understand
CCA101
Elective Course
72
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Understand
2 Days
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
PowerFlex 700
Vector Control
Communications on
DeviceNet
CCA162
2:18 PM
Page 17
PowerFlex DC Drive
Start Up and
Configuration
CDD161
1 Day
IntelliCENTER
and DeviceNet
Configuration
2 Days
CCI106
2 Days
On-Site
Only
Course
1395 Drive
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CDD131
ArmorStart Distributed
Motor Controller
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
3 Days
CCA190
1336 PLUS ll
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
1336 PLUS
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCA129
3 Days
1 Day
CCA137
3 Days
Related e-Learning Products
Fundamentals of
AC/DC Motors
and Drives
Computer-Based
Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition
Web-Based Training –
Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
73
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 74
CCA101
AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive concepts and terminology. At the completion of
this course, students will have the necessary fundamental knowledge and skills required to attend other Rockwell Automation AC and DC drives courses. In this course,
students will gain the hands-on skills required to build a miniature DC motor and investigate how a variable-speed drive controls the speed and direction of an attached
motor. Students will also become familiar with the drive Human Interface Module (HIM), which allows programmers, maintainers, and troubleshooters access to
information stored within the drive.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Recognize AC/DC motor drive hardware and operation
• Select a replacement motor
• Recognize line protection and filtering device hardware and functions
• Prevent electrostatic damage
• Recognize AC/DC motor braking methods
• Test a drive using electrical measuring tools
• Preform pre-power and power-on checks
• Monitor and control a drive using the HIM
• Select a drive for basic applications
1336 PLUS™ Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to gain a fundamental understanding of motor and drive
concepts before they learn to program, maintain, and troubleshoot AC and DC
drives
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• General knowledge of electricity and electronics
• Familiarity with electrical measuring tools is helpful but not required
Job Aids Included
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary
Catalog #
ABT-D100-TSG10
CCA129
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.1
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with procedures to replace, initially program, and troubleshoot a 1336 PLUS AC drive system. Students will learn how to identify and
replace drive equipment and perform system checks. Students will also have the opportunity to use the Human Interface Module (HIM) and DriveTools™ software to
locate, monitor, and modify drive parameters. In addition, students will learn to identify and correct drive system problems. Integrated practice sessions will provide
students with the opportunity to combine the skills they learn in a real-world scenario.
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Recognize hardware
• Replace drive system equipment
• Perform pre-power and power-on checks
• Locate, monitor, and modify parameters
• Adjust drive system operation
• Configure the drive for initial start-up
• Verify initial operation and motor and feedback wiring
• Troubleshoot and correct drive system problems
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to replace, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot a
1336 PLUS AC drive system
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Working knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Experience using a multimeter, ammeter, and oscilloscope
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
1336 PLUS and PLUS II Quick Reference Guide
DriveTools Procedures Guide
1336 PLUS Troubleshooting Guide
74
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1336SF-TQR90
ABT-D500-TSJ50
ABT-1336S-TSJ20
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 75
1395 Drive Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CDD131
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.1
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course will provide students with the skills needed to replace, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot a 1395 drive. Students will learn about drive replacement,
pre-power and power-on checks, configuration, and troubleshooting. Students will practice procedures using a 1395 drive workstation. Highlights of this course include
working on drives equipped with discrete and multi-communications or node adapter boards and using multiple programming interfaces, such as the 1300
programming terminal, DriveTools, or ITS software. This course will also provide students with opportunities to practice troubleshooting drive malfunctions using a
detailed troubleshooting manual.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Test a 1395 drive system using electrical measuring tools
• Recognize and replace 1395 drive hardware
• Modify and monitor 1395 drive parameters
• Configure a 1395 drive for start-up
• Configure a 1395 drive discrete adapter board
• Verify correct scaling of 1395 drive feedback parameters
• Configure a drive MCA board or node adapter board
• Autotune a 1395 drive
• Troubleshoot 1395 drive system problems
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a 1395 DC drive
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Working knowledge of PLC-5 processors, DC motors, and drives
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
• Experience using a multimeter, ammeter, and oscilloscope
Job Aids Included
DriveTools Procedures Guide
1395 DC Drive Installation Guide
Catalog #
ABT-D500-TSJ50
ABT-1395-TSH50
PFX700S2-LD
PowerFlex® 700S Phase II
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
3 Days
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700S Phase II AC
drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose specific
load-related, environmental, and equipment faults. Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software to clear
faults and alarms. After each demonstration, students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700S drive.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for starting up, configuring, maintaining, and
troubleshooting PowerFlex 700S Phase II drives
Difficulty Level
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand PowerFlex 700S Phase II hardware
• Configure drive parameters
• Configure motor control options
• Select speed feedback options
• Configure a gear-in application
• Configure Synchlink communications
• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive
• Install and configure a ControlNet communications adapter
• Install and configure an EtherNet communications adapter
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Documentation
Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-20D-DRG71
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
75
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 76
RE0520
AutoMax Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course is designed to provide students with a general understanding of AutoMax hardware and to acquire the necessary skills to analyze the AutoMax
processors for information needed to troubleshoot the system. Students will also be provided an opportunity to monitor and load an AutoMax processor and to locate
the necessary points for voltage measurements. After completing this course, students will understand AutoMax hardware in order to perform basic troubleshooting.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• AutoMax concepts
• Hardware discussion
• AutoMax executive
• Configuration
• PC task
• Basic language
• Control block language
1336 PLUS II Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for the installation, maintenance, and repair of
AutoMax systems
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Familiarity with test equipment and drive systems
CCA137
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 2.1
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course prepares students to re-install 1336 PLUS II drive hardware components, make changes to the setup, and troubleshoot drive malfunctions. Students will
troubleshoot and repair a 1336 PLUS II drive, learning how to help decrease the downtime of equipment. Students will have the opportunity to maximize 1336 PLUS II
drive investments by taking advantage of the vast networking options and learning how to configure a 1336 PLUS II drive to communicate on various networks.
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Replace and wire drive hardware
• Test a drive using electrical measuring tools
• Perform drive pre-power and power-on checks
• Modify drive parameters using the Human Interface Module (HIM)
• Locate, monitor, and modify drive parameters using DriveTools
and DriveExplorer software
• Start up a drive
• Configure communications
• Troubleshoot and repair a drive
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to replace, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot a
1336 PLUS II drive
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices
• Experience using electrical measuring tools, such as a multimeter, megger,
oscilloscope, etc.
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
DriveTools Procedures Guide
DriveExplorer Procedures Guide
1336 PLUS II Troubleshooting Guide
1336 PLUS and PLUS II Quick Reference Guide
1336 PLUS and PLUS II Documentation Reference Guide CD
76
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-D500-TSJ50
ABT-D500-TSJ51
ABT-1336F-TSJ20
ABT-1336SF-TQR90
ABT-1336SF-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 77
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA163
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700 vector control
drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700 drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose specific load-related,
environmental, and equipment faults. Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer™, and DriveExecutive™ software to clear faults and alarms.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Replace and rewire PowerFlex 700 drive hardware
• Upload and download drive data
• Troubleshoot and clear PowerFlex 700 alarms
• Clear drive faults
• Troubleshoot PowerFlex 700 drive, load, and environmental faults
• Troubleshoot PowerFlex 700 drive equipment malfunctions
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
PowerFlex DC Drive Troubleshooting
(available on-site only)
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting PowerFlex 700 vector
control drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Troubleshooting Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Quick Reference Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-20B-TSJ20
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-20AB-TQR90
ABT-20AB-DRG70
CDD163
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Replace and Rewire PowerFlex DC hardware
• Locate and Modify PowerFlex DC drive parameters using the A3 LCD HIM, the
A6 LCD HIM , and drive software
• Clear PowerFlex DC drive alarms and faults
• Troubleshoot PowerFlex DC load/environmental faults and drive equipment
malfunctions
• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex DC drive
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for troubleshooting PowerFlex DC drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Knowledge of basic DC motor and drive fundamentals through the completion
of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience.
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex DC Drives Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Drives
Course Purpose
This skill-building course is delivered at your facility and requires 230V, 3-phase power to operate the workstations. This course introduces concepts and techniques
that will assist students in successfully troubleshooting a PowerFlex DC drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex DC drive hardware and properly rewire
the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose and correct specific faults. Throughout this course, students will have the chance to use a variety of troubleshooting
tools, including: LCD HIM, DriveExplorer™ software, and DriveExecutive™ software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive
hands-on practice using the PowerFlex DC drive. This course can be taken as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other courses in the
PowerFlex AC and DC drives curriculum for further skills development.
Catalog #
ABT-20P-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
77
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 78
ArmorStart® Distributed Motor Controller
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA190
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting an ArmorStart distributed motor controller for
communications on an existing DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform
tasks such as browsing the network, commissioning the ArmorStart node, and configuring parameters. Students will also gain experience commissioning the node and
configuring parameters using the 193-DNCT HIM (Human Interface Module). After each demonstration, students will be given an application-based exercise that offers
extensive hands-on practice using the ArmorStart distributed motor controller, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software, and the 193-DNCT HIM.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify ArmorStart distributed motor controller components
• Connect to the ArmorStart distributed motor controller
• Edit and monitor ArmorStart parameters
• Map ArmorStart distributed motor controller inputs and outputs
• Edit and monitor ArmorStart parameters using the 193-DNCT HIM
• Troubleshoot the ArmorStart distributed motor controller
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot an ArmorStart distributed
motor controller for communications on a DeviceNet network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course
(CCA101) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
PowerFlex® 755 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Catalog #
ABT-N100-TSJ50
CCA180
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 755 drive. Students
will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 755 drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose specific faults. Throughout the course,
students will have the chance to use a variety of maintenance and troubleshooting tools such as the new A-6 LCD HIM, DriveExplorer™ software, and
DriveExecutive™ software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 755 drive.
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify PowerFlex 755 drive hardware
• Find PowerFlex 7-Class drive data using the A-6 HIM
• Work with drive configuration and troubleshooting software
• Gather PowerFlex 755 fault and alarm data
• Clear PowerFlex 755 drive alarms
• Find and fix PowerFlex 755 drive faults
• Troubleshoot PowerFlex 755 load/environmental faults and
equipment malfunctions
• Replace and rewire PowerFlex 755 hardware
78
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting PowerFlex 755 drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 79
PowerFlex DC Drive Startup and
Configuration (available on-site only)
CDD161
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This skill-building course is delivered at your facility and requires 230V, 3-phase power to operate the workstations. This course introduces concepts and techniques
that will assist students in successfully starting up and configuring a PowerFlex DC drive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex DC drive hardware and verify
proper drive wiring. Students will also learn to perform startup tasks. Throughout this course, students will have the chance to use a variety of startup and
configuration tools, including: LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software. After each demonstration, students will be given exercises that offer
extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex DC drive. This course can be taken as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other courses in the
PowerFlex AC and DC drives curriculum for further skills development.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify PowerFlex DC drive hardware
• Configure PowerFlex DC drive parameters using the A3 LCD HIM, the A6 LCD
HIM, and software
• Prepare for a PowerFlex DC drive startup
• Apply power to a PowerFlex DC drive
• Tune the PowerFlex DC drive current regulator and speed regulator
• Commission a PowerFlex DC drive using drive software
• Install and Commission an EtherNet/IP adapter
• Control PowerFlex DC drive operation
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Communications on DeviceNet
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for starting up and configuring PowerFlex DC drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Knowledge of basic DC motor and drive fundamentals through the completion
of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101),
Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training
(ePass/WBT1PACK), or equivalent experience.
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex DC Drives Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-20P-DRG70
CCA162
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Connect a drive to a DeviceNet network
• Commission a node on a DeviceNet network
• Configure drive and adapter parameters using RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet software
• Manage DeviceNet EDS files for the drive
• Configure a DeviceNet scanner module to communicate with a drive
• Map drive inputs and outputs on a DeviceNet network
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for configuring PowerFlex 700 vector control drives to
communicate on a DeviceNet network
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Drives
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive to communicate
on an existing DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform tasks, such as
browsing the network, commissioning the PowerFlex 700 node, and configuring drive parameters. Students will also learn about scanner module configuration and input
and output mapping. This course is designed as a stand-alone course or it can be taken in conjunction with other PowerFlex 700 courses for further skill development.
Catalog #
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-N100-TSJ50
ABT-20AB-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
79
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 80
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Communications on ControlNet
CCA164
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course introduces students to techniques and instructions that will assist them in starting up a PowerFlex 700 AC drive and commissioning it on a ControlNet network.
Students will learn how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters and install and commission a ControlNet communications adapter. Students will also learn to
configure a ControlNet network and create network connections for Logix5000 controllers.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure drive parameters using an LCD HIM
• Configure drive parameters using DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software
• Upload and download PowerFlex 700 drive data
• Start up a PowerFlex 700 drive
• Install and configure a PowerFlex 700 drive ControlNet communications adapter
• Configure an offline ControlNet network
• Go online to a ControlNet network
• Enter scheduled ControlNet I/O data connections for Logix5000 controllers
• Enter ControlNet messages for Logix5000 controllers
• Control PowerFlex 700 drive operation
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up
PowerFlex 700 drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Quick Reference Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course ( CCA101) or equivalent experience
Catalog #
ABT-20AB-TQR90
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-20AB-DRG70
ABT-N200-TSJ50
CCA171-LD
PowerFlex 400 AC Drive Field Start Up
for HVAC Applications
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course provides fundamental concepts of AC/DC drive and motor operation to enable effective start up of PowerFlex 400 drives within the HVAC market. This
course provides students with information related to applications, proper drive selection, and sizing as well as various installation considerations. Students will learn
how to recognize PowerFlex 400 drive hardware and properly program and troubleshoot the drive as part of a typical start up service. Throughout this course,
students will use the LCD HIM and DriveExplorer™ software to program and monitor various drive parameters. After each demonstration, students will be given an
application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 400 drive.
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand basic drive and motor technology
• Relate product features to application needs
• Verify proper installation of the drive
• Effectively program the drive
80
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who will be conducting start up of PowerFlex 400 drives for
HVAC applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Previous experience working with AC Drive technology
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 81
PowerFlex 400/70/700 AC Drive Field
Start Up for Water Wastewater Applications
CCA174-LD
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with fundamental concepts of AC drive and motor operation to enable effective startup of PowerFlex 400, PowerFlex 70 EC (enhanced
control), and PowerFlex 700 VC (vector control) drives for water wastewater applications. This course also provides information related to applications, proper drive
selection and sizing, as well as various installation considerations and troubleshooting practices. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 400, 70 and 700
drive hardware and properly program and troubleshoot the drive as part of a typical startup. Throughout this course, you will use the LCD HIM. DriveExplorer software,
DriveExecutive software, and DriveObserver software to program and monitor various drive parameters. After each demonstration, students will be given an exercise
that offers hands-on practice using PowerFlex 400 and/or PowerFlex 700 VC drives.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Understand basics of drive and motor theory (review)
• Recognize PowerFlex 400/70/700 products
• Apply drive installation best practices
• Monitor and Modify drive parameters using hardware and software
• Program PowerFlex Drives
• Setup a drive to communicate over Ethernet
• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex drive over Ethernet
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for starting up PowerFlex drives in Water Wastewater
applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or Fundamentals of AC and DC Motors and Drives web-based training
(ePass/WBT1PACK) or equivalent experience
CCI106-LD
IntelliCENTER® and DeviceNet™
Configuration
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides the concepts, knowledge, and tools necessary to design, specify, install, troubleshoot, and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC. During the
course, students will employ control and communication architectures by solving sample architecture problems presented in class. Students will also learn to use various
software tools associated with DeviceNet MCCs, such as RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software in addition to MCC start-up, maintenance, and replacement.
The last day focuses on network configuration, mapping of scanners, and PLC programming in a DeviceNet MCC system.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Control engineers, electrical technicians, and system integrators who will be
involved in designing, installing, and using IntelliCENTER/DeviceNet MCCs.
Difficulty Level
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Understand DeviceNet, RSLinx, and RSNetWorx
• Understand basics of the software
• Understand advanced features of IntelliCENTER
• Search for EDS files
• Wire DeviceNet and receive the MCC
• Add MCC units and sections
• Replace a device/auto-device and node recovery options
• Configure ControlLogix for communications
• Understand DeviceNet scanner mapping
• Understand basic programming concepts
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Familiarity with PLC programming software
• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
81
09_Drives
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 82
RE0523
AutoMax Programming Fundamentals
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course is designed to present students with the elementary details of the AutoMax programming languages. Students will be provided an opportunity to become
oriented with and use both the online and offline AutoMax Executive screens. After completing this course, students will be able to use the AutoMax Executive
Program, understand the differences in AutoMax languages, and use a variety of AutoMax programming features.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Hardware overview
• PC tasks
• Tasking
• Control block
• AutoMax variables
• Reliance basics
• Configuration
• Network
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for modifying and/or adding functionality to their
AutoMax system
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Familiarity with drive systems, AutoMax hardware, and AutoMax Executive
• Completion of the AutoMax Maintenance and Troubleshooting (RE0520) course
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control
Configuration and Startup
CCA161
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring and starting up a PowerFlex 700 vector control drive.
Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters. The instructor will also demonstrate how to install and
commission remote I/O, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, and ControlNet communications adapters. Then, students will practice these tasks during hands-on exercises using the
LCD HIM, DriveExplorer™ software, and DriveExecutive™ software. This course is designed as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other
PowerFlex 700 courses for further skill development.
Drives
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Configure drive parameters using DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software
• Configure drive parameters using an LCD HIM
• Start up a drive, upload and download drive data
• Control drive operation
• Install and configure a EtherNet/IP communications adapter
• Optional: Install and configure a DeviceNet, ControlNet, and remote I/O
communications adapter
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up
PowerFlex 700 vector control drives
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the AC/DC Motor and Drive Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Quick Reference Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
82
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-20B-TSJ50
ABT-20AB-TQR90
ABT-20AB-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
10_Process Control
5/6/2010
1:55 PM
Page 83
Process Control
Process Control
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:18 PM
Page 18
Process Control Curriculum Map
System-Level
PlantPAx
Process Automation
System Integration
PRS013
Program and Design
4.5 Days
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Function
Block Programming
CCP152
2 Days
Fuzzy Logic Design
and Development
PRS012
2 Days
Maintain
PID Loop
Development and
Tuning
Understand
PRS010
Elective Course
84
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
1 Day
Understand
Maintain
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
FOUNDATION
Fieldbus Basics
CCPC02-LD
4 Days
4/26/2010
2:19 PM
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
PhaseManager
Project Design
CCP711
1 Day
Page 19
FactoryTalk
Batch Server and
Configuration Tools
FactoryTalk Batch
Phase Design
(formerly RSBizWare Batch)
(formerly RSBizWare Batch)
RS-BATRG
5 Days
RS-ABATRG
3 Days
System-Level
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
85
10_Process Control
5/6/2010
1:56 PM
Page 86
PRS010
PID Loop Development and Tuning
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 0.7
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course enables students to develop an understanding of process control by allowing you to practice PID control methods. This course prepares students for further
process control classes with more specialized applications and design involvement. This course provides students with the skills needed to obtain a tuned process
control loop for typical applications. Students will create and develop a process model; calculate proportional, integral, and derivative gains; verify gains using ladder
diagram; practice PID programming in function block diagram and learn how to autotune typical PID loops.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a process reaction curve
• Develop a process model
• Determine the control action
• Configure program timing
• Program simple PID loop using function block diagram
• Calculate and verify PID gains in ladder diagram
• Autotune a PID loop
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for developing and tuning a PID loop
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Completion of the RSLogix™ 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
• ISA Process Control Fundamentals training or equivalent experience is
recommended but not required
• Knowledge of automation systems and experience using function block
diagrams is helpful but not required
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000™ Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
CCPC02-LD
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Basics
4 Days
Course Purpose
This advanced skill and knowledge building course provides students with the necessary foundations of using open protocols with multiple measurement technologies,
such as temperature and pressure. Output devices, such as valve positioners, will also be covered. Students will be presented with FOUNDATION Fieldbus technologies
using the Rockwell Automation 1757-FFLD and 1788-CN2FF linking device. Additional material on Device Descriptions, advanced function block theory, and
troubleshooting techniques will be covered in this course. Students will perform hands-on exercises to provide them with an understanding of how to connect their
Smart instrument networks to a Rockwell Automation system.
Process Control
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Fieldbus basics
• Fieldbus function blocks
• Fieldbus device description files
• Fieldbus communications
• Fieldbus wiring and media components
• Relcom FBT-3 Fieldbus monitor usage and operation
• FOUNDATION and ControlNet to FOUNDATION Fieldbus linking device
and software
• HSE OPC server
• 1757-FFLD and 1788-CN2FF troubleshooting
86
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who have little or no working experience with Smart instrumentation
or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming
course (CCP151) and/or
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143)
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
10_Process Control
5/6/2010
1:56 PM
Page 87
PRS012
Fuzzy Logic Design and Development
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
CEUs 1.4
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides you with the skills to produce a fuzzy control system for a continuous process application. It introduces the range of options for fuzzy systems
but focuses on using fuzzy logic to adjust the gains of a PID loop to meet specific control requirements. Starting with a description of a process, you will decide if
fuzzy logic is the best control method. You will design the fuzzy system, develop it in FuzzyDesigner software, and implement it in a Logix5000 controller. You
will also use FuzzyDesigner’s simulation, graphing, and online monitoring tools to validate the system against control requirements.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Choose a control scheme
• Identify terms and membership parameters
• Write rules
• Create FuzzyDesigner components
• Simulate execution of a a Fuzzy system
• Graph inputs and outputs
• Create and monitor a Fuzzy add-on instruction
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Function Block Programming
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to design, develop, or implement advanced process control
applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
Ability to perform these RSLogix 5000 software skills:
• Entering and editing logic
• Downloading and going online
• Monitoring and editing data
CCP152
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
2 Days
CEUs 1.4
Course Purpose
This course provides students with an understanding of RSLogix 5000 function block diagrams and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are also provided
to program a Logix5000 controller using function block diagrams. Students will perform parameter modifications to function block instructions and create and
develop function block diagram programs and routines.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for developing, debugging, and programming Logix5000
controllers using function block diagrams
• Use ActiveX controls in an operator interface, such as RSView®32 software
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Understanding of basic measurement and control theory,
including basic loop control
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Process Control
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a function block diagram
• Program logical function block instructions
• Program timer and counter function block instructions
• Program analog function block instructions
• Program device driver function block instructions
• Insert ActiveX faceplates from function block instructions
• Select timing modes in a function block instruction
• Program and monitor an RMPS (ramp/soak) function block instruction
• Control program flow using function block instructions
• Program a function block PIDE instruction
• Develop an add-on instruction in function block diagram
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
87
10_Process Control
5/6/2010
1:56 PM
Page 88
RS-ABATRG
FactoryTalk® Batch Phase Design
(formerly RSBizWare Batch)
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course is designed to expose students to creating phases (manual, automated, PC-based, and material-based).
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Define the programming hierarchy involved in implementing automated phases
• Create phases able to communicate to the RSBizWare batch server
• Create VB phases that interface with the phase execution OCX
• Modularize a manual or semi-auto plant using the S88.01 batch standard
• Successfully use the following FactoryTalk eProcedure interface screens
• Use the FactoryTalk eProcedure interface to:
- Create, monitor, and control batches
- Acknowledge instructions
- Enter report values
• Use the equipment editor to define manual phases
• Use the recipe editor to create recipes containing manual phases
• Create an HTML phase
• Describe the SP95 material model
• Use the FactoryTalk MaterialTrack material editor to:
- Define and associate materials and containers
- Create lots and distribute to containers
• Use the equipment editor to define and implement material-based phases
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
PhaseManager Project Design
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who intend to implement an FactoryTalk Batch control system that
utilizes manual, automated, PC-based, or material phases
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the FactoryTalk Batch Server and Configuration Tools course
(RS-BATRG)
CCP711
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
1 Day
CEUs 0.7
Course Purpose
This course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications in accordance with the S88 state model using the
PhaseManager feature. This course presents a tool that will help you effectively organize and structure batch applications. Students will organize an RSLogix 5000
project by identifying control and equipment modules within application code. Students will separate equipment code from equipment phase code, configure state
logic to transition between equipment states, and complete a project that uses an internal sequencer to activate each of the equipment phases according to
a batch procedure.
Process Control
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Define equipment phases and state models in an RSLogix 5000 project
• Separate equipment code from equipment phase code
• Test an equipment phase
• Configure an internal sequencer using phase instructions
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to apply the S88 state model to RSLogix 5000 projects for
any Logix5000 controller
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or advanced programming experience using RSLogix 5000 software
• Familiarity with sequential function chart programming language
88
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
10_Process Control
5/6/2010
1:56 PM
Page 89
RS-BATRG
FactoryTalk Batch Server
and Configuration Tools (formerly RSBizWare Batch)
5 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides a complete overview of the FactoryTalk Batch system, including an introduction to batch processing and the ISA S88.01 Standard.
FactoryTalk batch system architecture, system operation, and system configuration are covered in detail.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to:
• Use the batch view application to create, monitor, and control batches
• Use the equipment editor to create an area model of the equipment database
• Use the recipe editor to create and validate both class-based and
unit-based recipes
• Create reports using the report editor and/or batch archiver
• Interface with the batch server using its object model and ActiveX controls
• Perform system administration tasks including configuring the FactoryTalk
batch server, configuring and implementing batch view security and enabling
a remote batch view machine
• Use the FactoryTalk batch simulator to test and debug area model
configurations as well as recipes
PlantPAx™ Process Automation
System Integration
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are involved with the installation, setup, and operation of
FactoryTalk control systems
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Familiarity with S88 Batch Standard is helpful
PRS013
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
4.5 Days
CEUs 3.2
Course Purpose
This course provides the skills to develop applications for a process control system according to design specifications. Students will be introduced to the navigation
and structure for automation system development. Students will learn about controllers and operator stations in an integrated fashion so students see their relationships to each other and to the complete system. During this course, students will focus on the equipment control aspects and learn to create and organize a
new project, develop control algorithms in function block programming language, create interactive displays for the operators, set up alarms, and
develop trends of real-time data.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who develop process control applications
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Process Control
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Determine system size, workstation layout, operator controls, and
performance requirements
• Communicate with I/O modules
• Configure instrument devices, global objects, and security
• Design sequential function
• Program a PID loop
• Program assignments, expressions, and instructions in structured text
• Create graphic displays and alarms
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course.
Job Aids Included
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
89
10_Process Control
5/6/2010
1:57 PM
Page 90
INSTRUCT
Knowledge Transfer Through Performance-Based Courses
Instructor-Led Courses
Looking for world-class courses that will affect
overall productivity and your bottom line?
Choose from our instructor-led courses:
• Standard Courses - Over 250 open-enrollment
classes focused on relevent technologies
and job tasks
• Tailored Courses - Combine lessons on job tasks
from 1600 learning modules to match your needs
• Custom Courses - Training designed with your
equipment, software, and specifications in mind
• On-Site Courses - Any Rockwell Automation
course at your facility or another
convenient location
• Embedded Instructors - Ongoing
in-house training with unparalleled
immediacy and responsiveness
• Certificate Program - ControlLogix
maintenance and programming
certificate for market differentiation
through product specialization
New!
Process Control
Free pre- and post-test services are
available with standard on-site courses to
gauge knowledge transfer and demonstrate
a return on investment.
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
90
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:03 PM
Page 91
Condition Monitoring
Condition Monitoring
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:19 PM
Page 20
Condition Monitoring Curriculum Map
Emonitor Basic
EK-ICM141
Datapac Applications
4 Days
EK-ICM161
3 Days
Program and Design
Emonitor Advanced
EK-ICM221
4 Days
XM System
Fundamentals
EK-ICM165
2 Days
Dynamic Balancing
Understand
EK-ICM121
3 Days
Vibration Analysis:
Level l
Vibration Analysis
Fundamentals
EK-ICM101
Elective Course
92
3 Days
Instructor-Led Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
EK-ICM201
Understand
3.5 Days
Program and Design
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
4/26/2010
2:20 PM
Page 21
Enpac Applications
EK-ICM162
3 Days
Time Waveform
Analysis
EK-ICM281
Vibration Analysis:
Level ll
EK-ICM261
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
3.5 Days
2 Days
Vibration Analysis:
Level lll
EK-ICM301
3.5 Days
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
93
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 94
EK-ICM101
Vibration Analysis Fundamentals
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course is designed for the new user of vibration analysis or predictive maintenance instrumentation or for the individual that desires to become more familiar with
the basics of vibration. The relationship between the mechanical condition of machinery and vibration is presented. This background helps show how vibration detection
and analysis can be used in a cost-effective program to identify machinery problems and schedule repairs to avoid costly machine downtime. Basic vibration measures
including amplitude, frequency, and phase are discussed. Students will realize significant benefits from the practical hands-on measurement exercises using modern data
collectors and analyzers. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Introduction to vibration technology and analysis
• Characteristics of vibration
• Vibration frequency, amplitude, and phase-to-machine condition
• Review of severity charts
• Instruments for vibration detection and analysis
• Transducer selection and mounting methods
• Calculate trial and correction weights
Who Should Attend?
New users of vibration analysis or predictive maintenance systems
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course.
EK-ICM201
Vibration Analysis: Level 1
3.5 Days
Course Purpose
The fundamental information necessary to implement and operate a successful predictive maintenance program is presented in this seminar. Vibration basics and the
relationship between vibration and machinery condition are reviewed. Proven techniques for specifying meaningful overall and spectrum band alarm limits for a wide
variety of machinery is presented. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course. The material in this course is applicable to all
vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Characteristics of vibration and review of severity charts
• Vibration transducer overview and selection criteria
• Role of spike energy, HFD, and shock pulse and alarm levels
• Vibration signature analysis to diagnose machine problems
• How to track rolling element bearing health
• Methods for specifying spectral alarm band levels and frequencies
• Common pitfalls in vibration measurements
Condition Monitoring
94
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Mechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in the maintenance or
operation of plant machinery
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• 6 months or more of field experience
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101)
or similar course.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 95
EK-ICM261
Vibration Analysis: Level ll
3.5 Days
Course Purpose
This seminar is designed to advance the knowledge base of vibration analysts having one to three years of experience. The course begins with a brief review of
Vibration Analysis I topics and then moves to more in-depth applications of the illustrated vibration diagnostic chart. Advanced alarm setting techniques based on
statistical analysis are explained for both overall and band alarms. Advanced measurement techniques including natural frequency testing and high frequency envelope
signal analysis are covered. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’
vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Data acquisition and FFT processing for reliable spectral analysis
• Introduction to natural frequency test methods
• Vibration diagnostics using phase analysis and cascade diagrams
• Vibration signature analysis using the vibration diagnostic chart
• Introduction to Narrowband Envelope (statistical) alarms
• Introduction to isolation and damping
Who Should Attend?
Mechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in predictive maintenance
or vibration analysis
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• 12 months or more of field experience
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level 1 (EK-ICM201) or similar course
EK-ICM301
Vibration Analysis: Level III
3.5 Days
Course Purpose
In this advanced course, several powerful techniques, including high frequency envelope signal analysis, time waveform, and deflection shape analysis, are presented
to increase the effectiveness of experienced vibration analysts. The analysis of high speed, low speed, and variable speed machinery is presented with consideration
of the special transducer and instrumentation requirements of these applications. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course.
The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Mechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in predictive maintenance
or vibration analysis
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• 18 months or more of experience in vibration analysis or predictive maintenance
• Completion of an Entek Vibration Analysis: Level II (EK-ICM261) or other similar
course is recommended.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
95
Condition Monitoring
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Introduction to motor current spectral analysis
• How to detect problems with DC motors and their controls
• Time waveform analysis
• How to analyze high speed machines
• How to analyze variable speed machines
• How to evaluate the achievements of your plant’s
condition monitoring program
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 96
EK-ICM121
Dynamic Balancing
3 Days
Course Purpose
Identifying and effectively correcting balance problems are the focus of this course. The course begins by defining unbalance and explaining the benefits of properly
balanced rotating machinery. Various methods of solving unbalance problems including single-plane, two-plane, and multi-plane techniques are presented. Each of
these solution methods is taught for both in place field balancing and balancing machine applications. An optional certification test is administered during the last
half day of this course.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Introduction to dynamic balancing
• Basic principal of balancing
• Use of phase to determine the types of unbalance
• Two-plane and multi-plane balancing techniques
• Critical speed/resonance
• Single-plane vector balancing
• Dividing and combining correction weights
• Weight removal and flat stock conversion charts
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have involvement in balancing and machine reliability
• Currently do balancing work either on a balancing stand or in the field
• Specify balancing tolerances or design machines
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course, but previous balancing experience is
helpful and completion of theVibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101)
course is recommended.
EK-ICM281
Time Waveform Analysis
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course emphasizes the use of time waveform data to accurately identify a wide range of vibration phenomena not easily detected using spectral data. Real-world
case histories are used to demonstrate how time waveform analysis can identify problems likely missed by standard spectral analysis, as well as to confirm results of
spectral analysis. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Introduction to Time Waveform Analysis (TWA)
• Time Waveform benefits and fundamentals
• Setup parameters for TWA
• Interpretation of Time Waveform data
• Natural frequency testing
• Time synchronous averaging
• Case histories utilizing Time Waveform Analysis
Who Should Attend?
Experienced analysts who have a thorough understanding of vibration
fundamentals and want to better use this important diagnostic tool
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level ll (EK-ICM261) or similar course
• 9…12 months of experience with vibration spectral analysis is recommended
Condition Monitoring
96
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 97
EK-ICM165
XM® System Fundamentals
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is a skill-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of XM systems and terminology. This course also introduces students to
XM system components and functionality. Students will have an opportunity to use the XM Serial Configuration Utility and RSMACC™ software to perform various
software tasks. In addition, students will be introduced to vibration fundamentals and will have an opportunity to configure proximity probes and accelerometers
connected to XM modules. Connecting non-vibration measurement devices to the appropriate XM module will also be discussed.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following tasks
and topics:
• Characteristics of vibration
• Introduction to RSMACC
• Configure XM modules through RSMACC and XM serial configuration utility
• Set-up measurements and alarms for XM systems
• Overview of each XM module
• Use of the XM440 master relay module
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who have little or no working experience with XM systems
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) is
recommended
EK-ICM141
Emonitor® Basic
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course will put students on the fast track to success using Emonitor. Students will become familiar with the features and operation of Microsoft Windows and
Emonitor. Instruction on the basics of installation, database set-up, and loading/unloading data collectors guide you through the process of gathering machinery
information. Interpreting this information using a variety of plots and reports is then covered, helping students put their system to work solving machinery problems.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Anyone who is new to Emonitor and must use it either daily to complete their
duties or only occasionally to look up data, run reports, or act as a system
administrator
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) or
similar course
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Condition Monitoring
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following tasks:
• Building a database
• Adding machines, locations, and measurements
• Creating, saving, and using lists
• Using templates and editing existing databases
• Loading and unloading
• Importing data
• Creating custom plots
• Using plots and reports with word processors
97
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 98
EK-ICM221
Emonitor Advanced
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course helps the established user increase their efficiency and their overall program effectiveness using Emonitor Odyssey/Enshare. In-depth coverage of the program
provides students with the information they need to customize operations for specific machine applications. Set-up of advanced measurements and custom templates
tailor the database to fit difficult machine applications. Customized reporting and plotting allows students to design program output that is most readily understood within
their plant. The statistical alarming capabilities are covered thoroughly in this course, providing students with the most powerful tool for efficient use of overall, band, and
narrow-band spectral alarms.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following tasks
and topics:
• Measurement options and advanced list options
• Special measurements
• Load/unload and data import review
• Detailed plotting
• Create custom reports and plots
• Statistical alarms and outlier detection
• Spectral band and narrow-band alarming
• Configure and use frequency items
Who Should Attend?
Established users of Emonitor Odyssey/Enshare who have one or more years of
experience using the product
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• One year or more experience with Emonitor Odyssey/Enshare
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level 1 course (EK-ICM201)
EK-ICM161
Datapac® Applications
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course covers the full range of operations of the Datapac® 1500, from basic to advanced, providing excellent information for beginning or experienced
Datapac users.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Datapac utility program and setup options
• Transfering data between the Datapac and Emonitor
• Basic operations including loading, unloading and collecting overall and
spectrum data
• Advanced measurement techniques (e.g. Time Waveform collection, Time
Synchronous averaging, phase measurement and spike energy spectrum
collection)
• Frequency response function
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who use the Datapac and would like to learn more about the
instrument’s data collection and vibration analysis capabilities
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals course (EK-ICM101) or
similar course
• Completion of the Emonitor Basic course (EK-ICM141) is recommended
• 3…6 months of experience with the Datapac 1500 is recommended
Condition Monitoring
98
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 99
EK-ICM162
Enpac® Applications
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course covers the full range of operations of the Enpac 1200 and Enpac 2500, from basic to advanced, providing excellent information for beginning or
experienced Enpac users. Basic operations including loading, unloading, and collecting overall and spectrum data are presented, as well as advanced measurement
techniques, such as time waveform collection, time synchronous averaging, phase measurement, and spike energy spectrum collection. The Enpac two-plane
balancing and two-channel applications are also covered in this course.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who use the Enpac and would like to learn more about the instrument’s
data collection and vibration analysis capabilities
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) or
similar course
• Completion of the Emonitor Basic course (EK-ICM141) is recommended
• 3…6 months of experience with the Enpac 1200 or Enpac 2500 is
recommended
Condition Monitoring
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Enpac operating program and setup options
• Route configuration and data collection options
• Transfer of data between the Enpac and Emonitor
• Time Synchronous measurements
• Two-channel measurements
• ESP and spike energy overview
• Phase measurements
• Balancing with the Enpac
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
99
11_Condition Monitoring
5/6/2010
2:04 PM
Page 100
PRACTICE
Reinforce Knowledge and Job Skills Through Learning Tools
Self-Paced Tools
Would it help to have answers on hand
when a problem occurs?
Need to train operators without
experimenting on your production line?
Job Aids are utilized on site when
and where problems occur to
troubleshoot or use step-by-step
procedures for accuracy and efficiency.
Workstations are the ideal tool to
reinforce and practice maintenance,
troubleshooting, and programming skills,
train new employees or transition from
one technology to another.
Now you can include Workstations
on Rockwell Automation Parts
Management Agreements giving you
greater flexibility and value.
Condition Monitoring
100
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 101
____Software
____Courses
Software Courses
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 102
Software Courses
Rockwell Automation software courses address
today’s diverse plant information needs, such as:
• Production management – real-time coordination
across plant-wide production processes
• Data management – tools and methods used for
collecting, transforming, and integrating
production information
• Asset management – optimizing maintenance and
plant operations to improve resource availability
• Performance and visibility – offering a
window into the process so plant
personnel can make better decisions
Real-time exchange of information between
manufacturing and the rest of your
company is critical for making business
decisions that improve responsiveness,
increase productivity, and reduce costs.
With Rockwell Automation software
courses, you can learn how to integrate
your factory floor.
Course
Number
Course Name
Course
Length
RS-FTACC
FactoryTalk® AssetCentre Configuration
2 Days
RS-MSSQLB
Microsoft® SQL Server for FactoryTalk Introduction 2 Days
RS-FTMHCC
FactoryTalk Metrics with Historian
Classic Configuration
4 Days
RS-RSMACC
RSMACC Installation and Configuration
3 Days
RS-FTTM
FactoryTalk Transaction Manager (formerly RSSql) 3 Days
RS-RSTS101-LD RSTestStand™ Enterprise Project Development
RS-FTHMEC
FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition
Configuration and Data Collection
2 Days
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition
Configuration and Data Collection
3.5 Days
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition Data
Analyzing and Reporting
3.5 Days
RS-FTVP
FactoryTalk VantagePoint Configuration
3 Days
RS-FTVPEMI
FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI Configuration
and Reporting
4 Days
Power Monitor Installation and
RSEnergyMetrix® Software Configuration
in an Energy Monitoring System
2.5 Days
RS-FTHSEC
RS-FTHSEDA
RS-EMPM
Software____
Courses____
102
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
2 Days
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 103
RS-FTACC
FactoryTalk AssetCentre
Configuration
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with a set of asset-centric focused tools to securely and centrally manage factory and process automation production environments.
FactoryTalk AssetCentre will help students secure access to the control system, track users' actions, manage asset configuration files, configure process instruments and
provide backup and recovery of operating asset configurations. In this course, students will have the opportunity to load the software and practice many critical tasks,
such as implementing disaster recovery (continuation planning), tracking user actions, improving plant-floor security, and protecting intellectual property.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install FactoryTalk AssetCentre software
• Install the FactoryTalk AssetCentre client remotely
• Configure FactoryTalk AssetCentre audits
• Configure FactoryTalk AssetCentre disaster recovery
• Configure FactoryTalk AssetCentre archive
• Understand FactoryTalk AssetCentre searches
• Understand FactoryTalk AssetCentre address book and e-mail notification
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to securely and centrally manage factory and process
automation production environments
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Knowledge of your production environment is recommended
RS-MSSQLB
Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalk
Introduction (formerly RSBizWare)
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the technical skills required to implement a database solution with Microsoft SQL Server client/server database
management system.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to understand and implement a database solution with the
Microsoft SQL Server system
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience using the Microsoft Windows NT® server network operating system
• One year of experience with relational databases
• 3…6 months of SQL server expertice
• Understanding of basic ANSI SQL statements
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
103
____Software
____Courses
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Describe the elements of Microsoft SQL server and the Transact-SQL language
• Describe and configure the data storage architecture of SQL server
• Create and manage files, file groups, databases, tables, and transaction logs
• Enforce data integrity using constraints, defaults, and rules
• Create and maintain indexes
• Write queries that retrieve and modify data using joins and subqueries
• Create views of data
• Design and create stored procedures
• Design and create triggers
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 104
RS-FTMHCC
FactoryTalk Metrics with Historian Classic
Configuration
4 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will learn to use Historian's data collection and data analysis functions to perform logging, reporting, and viewing of data. Students will also
learn to use the reporting, graphing, and querying functionality that make FactoryTalk a complete and very easy-to-use solution for data collection and analysis.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a FactoryTalk metrics database and user
• Create system DSN
• Install FactoryTalk Metrics software and RSLinx Enterprise
• Administrate FactoryTalk Metrics with the service console
• Create a FactoryTalk application
• Create FactoryTalk Metrics plant model
• Configure FactoryTalk Metrics workcell and user defined events
• Create FactoryTalk Metrics report data source
• Create text and chart reports
• Install and use the FactoryTalk Metrics Report Expert
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to collect PLC data, as well as analyze and report that data
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• A basic understanding of PLC processors
• Knowledge of basic client/server database concepts is recommended,
but not required
• Familiarity with basic networking concepts is strongly recommended,
but not required
• Knowledge or experience with Microsoft SQL Server is helpful
Try Our Web-Based and Computer-Based Training for Free!
Sign up for a free 5-day trial of our web-based training
and visit Rockwell Automation University Online!
Go to: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/webbased.html
Software____
Courses____
104
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 105
RS-RSMACC
RSMACC Installation and Configuration
3 Days
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide students with fundamental information on the RSMACC software package, to include planning an RSMACC system, installation,
configuration, and change management. Students will receive hands-on practice using the various RSMACC components in live lab networked environments.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install RSMACC server components on server machine
• Configure RSMACC server
• Install RSMACC client components on client machine
• Configure RSMACC client machine
• Install and configure RSMACC change management
• Install and configure RSMACC network health components
• Understand RSMACC Enterprise Online Condition Monitor (EOL) components
• Understand RSMACC Automated Asset Manager (AAM) components
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Have recently purchased an RSMACC system
• Have systems installed and want to upgrade their knowledge of Change
Management, Network Health, Condition Monitoring, or AAM Components
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Basic understanding of databases
RS-FTTM
FactoryTalk Transaction Manager
(formerly RSSQL)
3 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will learn about configuring FactoryTalk Transaction Manager in a Microsoft SQL Server environment. Students will also work with FactoryTalk
Services Platform and Transaction Manager components. Then, students will bind processor datapoints to SQL database fields using the FactoryTalk graphic interface.
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create single-computer and distributed FactoryTalk configurations, edit a running transaction, understand the
concepts for creating transactions, understand the reasons for handshaking with the control system, and configure and use the update object.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Engineers, plant managers, and maintenance personnel who use PLC data to
manage or maintain plant processes
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience with SQL database software
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
105
____Software
____Courses
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Edit a running FactoryTalk Transaction Manager application
• Configure a unidirectional transaction with bind transaction result
• Understand handshaking errors and data/loss results
• Recognize FactoryTalk Transaction Manager built-in functions
• Configure math functions minimum maximum and average
• Configure advance functions
• Configure FactoryTalk Transaction Manager
• Move a FactoryTalk Transaction Manager application
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 106
RS-RSTS101-LD
RSTestStand™ Enterprise Project
Development
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with a working knowledge of the RSTestStand Enterprise control systems simulation software. Upon completion of this course, students
will gain the skills to create, validate, troubleshoot, and tune RSTestStand Enterprise Projects using RSTestStand simulation software. This course also provides
hands-on practices to reinforce the tasks involved in designing, testing, and implementing an effective simulation model of a machine and/or process. From creating
and running project models and run-time scenarios to animating scenes and binding actions to resources, students will have the opportunity to fully understand the
capabilities of RSTestStand Enterprise simulations and the benefits of this virtual modeling process with regard to start-up time, design flaw identification, problem
resolution, and end-user training.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Create a project model
• Create and modify resources
• Build operator consoles and create a connection diagram
• Create run-time scenarios
• Create, animate, and control scenes
• Create and run a Part Flow Model and bind actions to resources
• Build logical views
• Troubleshoot and tune RSTestStand Enterprise projects using productivity tools
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for designing, starting up, installing, and
troubleshooting automation control systems and equipment
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Basic understanding of PLC processors or completion of the
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
• Knowledge of basic VB scripting concepts
• Familiarity with basic OPC and detailed understanding of RSLinx software is
recommended
RS-FTHMEC
FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition
Configuration and Data Collection
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the skills to collect and view real-time process and production information using FactoryTalk Historian tools. Students will first learn
how to install and configure a FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition module. Then, students will be introduced to various high-speed data collection tools to monitor and
analyze operation and product quality. From within the FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition module, students will use the Discovery Rule Editor to identify tags for
data collection. Students will practice applying exception and compression methods to filter data for archiving purposes. Students will be given an opportunity to
configure a Historian Site Edition Server to upload data from Machine Edition. Also, Students will gain experience using the RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile to interact
with the FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition module via a ControlLogix program.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install and configure a FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition module
• Add tags and view current and archived data from the web interface
• Use FactoryTalk Rule Editor to discover tags, DataLink to display Machine
Edition data in a spreadsheet, and VantagePoint to create and display trends
and reports with Machine Edition data
• Filter data to be archived using exception and compression
• Select data collection scan types and rates
• Integrate FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition into FactoryTalk Directory
• Manage FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition security
• Upload Historian Machine Edition archived data to a Site Edition server
• Back up and restore a FactoryTalk Machine Edition module’s configuration
• Use RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile (AOP)
• Trend Machine Edition data in a FactoryTalk View display
Software____
Courses____
106
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to install and configure FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition
for data collection
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
(CCP146) course or knowledge of common ControlLogix terminology and the
ability to program and interpret basic ladder logic instructions in RSLogix 5000
software
• Experience working in a FactoryTalk environment
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 107
RS-FTHSEC
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition
Configuration and Data Collection
3.5 Days
Course Purpose
This course will provide students with an overview of the various FactoryTalk Historian tools for collecting data. Students will learn how to install and configure a
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition system and how to use Microsoft Excel to create and modify FactoryTalk Historian tags. During the course, students will learn how to
apply exception and compression to filter data to be archived. Students will be given an opportunity to compare the use of Polled versus Advised data collection modes
and learn about data buffering, layers/methods of redundancy, archive management and backup. Upon completion of the course, students will have gained exposure to
the many aspects of the FactoryTalk Historian system and be able to install and configure FactoryTalk Historian to collect data.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install FactoryTalk Historian
• Use Discover Historian points, data collection with handshaking, FTLD Health
Points and Archive Management Tools, and audit information
• Understand Historian tags and use Excel tag configurator, exception &
compression and basic alarms
• Configure event trigger reads/basic output points, event framing-BaGen,
performance equations/totalizers, and interface redundancy/collectives
• Buffer disturbed FTLD interface data
• Work with digital states
• Schedule backups of Historian data
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to install and configure FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition for
data collection
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
(CCP146) course or knowledge of common ControlLogix terminology and the
ability to program and interpret basic ladder logic instructions in RSLogix 5000
software
RS-FTHSEDA
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition Data
Analyzing and Reporting
3.5 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will learn various tools to analyze and display data collected by FactoryTalk Historian. Students will also learn how to use the updated trend
object in FactoryTalk View SE applications. Students will have an opportunity to use FactoryTalk Historian DataLink that accesses data from FactoryTalk Historian and
reports it in Microsoft Excel. This course will also focus on the use of FactoryTalk Historian ProcessBook to create applications for displaying real-time and historical
data. Upon completion of the course, students will be able to utilize many tools and techniques for the display, analysis and reporting of FactoryTalk Historian data.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who will work with existing FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition
applications and need to view, analyze and create reports based on the data
collected
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System
Fundamentals (CCP146) course or knowledge of common ControlLogix
terminology and the ability to program and interpret basic ladder logic
instructions in RSLogix 5000 software
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
107
____Software
____Courses
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Use View SE updated trend object to display Historian data
• Use data sets and relative objects in ProcessBook
• Use DataLink filtered compressed, time filtered, and calculated function
• Use reporting services
• Create and edit ProcessBook trends
• Insert ProcessBook displays in View SE via ActiveView
• Configure and use ProcessBook SQC
• Insert DataLink trend objects
• Configure and use Totalizer reporting modes
• Utilize ACE-Unit conversions
• View data from an SQL server database using ProcessBook
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 108
RS-FTVP
FactoryTalk® VantagePoint Configuration
and Reporting
3 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will learn to use various tools to analyze and display data in FactoryTalk VantagePoint software. Students will learn how to use the analysis
and reporting tools to create trends, XY plots, Excel reports, and dashboards. Students will have an opportunity to use the portal and configure it to display content in
various ways. This course also focuses on extending the model in the product and configuring security. Upon completion of the course, students will be able to utilize
many tools and techniques for the display, analysis, and reporting of FactoryTalk VantagePoint data.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install FactoryTalk VantagePoint and view reports in VantagePoint portal
• Import FactoryTalk live data structures/tags and historian tags
• Retrieve FactoryTalk alarms and events data
• Understand basics of VantagePoint Manager
• Create a basic and template Excel report and dashboard, a portal composite
report, model view, hyperlink, portal type rules, and content containers
• Configure user security and named users
• Use trend and XY plotter, an incuity tag for data entry, and a calculated tag
to evaluate expressions
• Extend the model with new instances and types
• Export/import sections of the model
• Back-up and troubleshoot a VantagePoint system
• Display a report with specific runtime parameters
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who will work with FactoryTalk VantagePoint applications and need to
view, analyze and create reports based on the data in FactoryTalk VantagePoint
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and T-SQL, Microsoft Office Excel
2003 Professional, Windows Server 2003, and web development
• The following is also helpful:
- Business intelligence and how it applies to your market
- Familiarity with Microsoft Excel
- Familiarity with FactoryTalk products and terminology
RS-FTVPEMI
FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI
Configuration and Reporting
4 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will learn various tools to analyze and display the data in FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI. Students will learn how to use the analysis and
reporting tools to create trends, XY plots, Excel reports, and dashboards. Students will have an opportunity to use the Portal and configure it to display content in
various ways. This course also focuses on extending the model in the product and configuring security. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize
many tools and techniques for the display, analysis, and reporting of FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI data.
Software____
Courses____
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Install FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI software
• Import FactoryTalk live data structures/tags and Historian tags
• Retrieve FactoryTalk alarms and events data
• Understand the basics of VantagePoint Manager
• Configure trend and XY plotter
• Create Excel reports/dashboards and links within both
• Use SQL queries in a report, Incuity tag for data entry, and calculated tag to
evaluate expressions
• Extend the model with new instances and types
• Connect to a database source and configure user security
• Create a database query item, tag providers, and mapped types
• Export/import sections of the model
• Back-up a VantagePoint EMI system and troubleshooting
• Configure the portal and change the VantagePoint EMI portal theme
• Create a portal composite report, model view, and hyperlink
• Create portal type rules and content containers
108
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who will work with FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI applications and
need to view, analyze and create reports based on the data in FactoryTalk
VantagePoint EMI software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience with Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and T-SQL, Microsoft Office Excel
2003 Professional, Windows Server 2003, and web development
• The following is also helpful:
- Business intelligence and how it applies to your market
- Familiarity with Microsoft Excel
- FactoryTalk products and terminology
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 109
Power Monitor Installation and
RSEnergyMetrix® Software Configuration
in an Energy Monitoring System
RS-EMPM
2.5 Days
Course Purpose
With RSEnergyMetrix, students can capture, analyze, store, and share energy data across their entire enterprise using a simple Web browser. This makes it simple to
distribute the knowledge students will need to optimize energy consumption, which can help improve productivity while lowering energy costs. This course provides
students with an understanding of 3-phase power fundamentals and how energy is paid for.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will understand the following topics and
tasks:
• Understand AC power, PEM products power monitors, and the basics of
RSEnergyMetrix software
• Install RSEnergyMetrix software
• Configure RSEnergyMetrix software
• Create RSEnergyMetrix custom reports
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to install and configure Allen-Bradley power monitors and
RSEnergyMetrix software in order to solve on-going, energy-related challenges
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• A basic understanding of 3-phase electric power
• A basic understanding of Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture
products, networks, and software
• It would also be helpful to have a basic understanding of:
- Internet server applications
- Microsoft SQL Server
- Microsoft Visual Basic scripting
New self-paced course!
Modular Programming for Machine Applications
In this self-paced course, you are guided by a technical expert
who will provide you with knowledge to produce a software
design specification for a machine or line of machines. The
specification will follow modular programming guidelines
and you will follow the technical expert through video and
audio
instructions.
By using a modular approach to your software design, your
software becomes much easier to reuse from
project to project. As your base of modular code increases,
your development time decreases. And, the quality of the
code increases each time you refine and re-use it.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
To purchase: Catalog #ABTMODPROG
Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation
sales office, or call 440-646-3434 (Option 4).
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
109
____Software
____Courses
Student kit includes:
• Training DVD
• Modular programming design guide
• PackML state model worksheet
• Related job aids and technical
documentation on disk to assist
you with modular programming
12_Software Courses
5/6/2010
2:05 PM
Page 110
Savings and Flexibility - Training Voucher Account
Do you have diverse employee development needs but a
limited training budget?
Our Training Voucher Account maximizes your
training budget by allowing you to prepurchase
vouchers for Rockwell Automation training courses
and products at a discounted cost (up to 20%). You
can redeem the vouchers at the time that best meets
the individual needs and schedule of each employee.
The vouchers can be redeemed at any time within one
year for instructor-led courses, self-paced training, job
aids, and workstations. A convenient online account
management tool and monthly statement
help you track your voucher usage.
For more information, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4),
contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor, or visit:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Software____
Courses____
110
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:06 PM
Page 111
Classic_____
Courses_____
13_Classic Courses
Classic Courses
13_Classic Courses
5/6/2010
2:06 PM
Page 112
_____Classic
_____Courses
Classic Courses
Rockwell Automation classic courses provide
training for legacy or specialized automation
products that are not typically included and
advertised in the Rockwell Automation Training
Services national course schedule. These courses
are available and can be scheduled as private
classes held either at a Rockwell Automation
training facility or on-site at your own facility.
You can schedule these courses by request and
by contacting your local Rockwell Automation
sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor. Minimum
class size is eight students and the maximum is
twelve students.
112
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Course
Number
Course Name
Course
Length
CCA124
1336 FORCE™ Maintenance and Troubleshooting 3 Days
CCA132
1336 IMPACT™ Troubleshooting
1 Day
CCA133
1336 IMPACT Startup
1 Day
CCA135
1336 IMPACT Communications
1 Day
CCA138
CCP198
1336 IMPACT Programming
PanelView™ 1000e/1200e/1400e and
PanelBuilder™ 1400e Application Development
1 Day
CNN162
CNC 9/Series Maintenance
4.5 Days
RE0521
AutoMax DC Drive Distributed Power System
4 Days
2 Days
RS-ECPD01-LD RSEnterprise Controls Project Implementation
4.5 Days
CDD132
3 Days
1397 Drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 113
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
Industrial, Quality, and Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 114
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
Industrial, Quality, and Management Courses
Additional Courses Offered*
Safety
Course
Course Code
Machine Safety Seminar
Lock-out/Tag-out Implementation
Electrical Safety Awareness
NFPA 70E – Arc Flash Awareness
Confined Space Entry Awareness
NFPA 70E — Electrical Safety and
Arc Flash Compliance
Lock-Out/Tag-Out Implementation and
Arc Flash Awareness
Plant Floor Arc Flash/LOTO/Confined Space Safety
SAF-SEM
SAF-SFT100
SAF-SFT101
SAF-SFT106
SAF-SFT110
SAF-SFT112
SAF-SFT117
SAF-SFT123
Electrical & Electronics
Course
Course Code
2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) Change Awareness SAF-SFT120
Industrial Electrical Controls Fundamentals
MFG213
Basics of Electricity
MFG244
Air and Fluid Power
Course
Course Code
Industrial Air Controls (Pneumatic) Fundamentals
Industrial Hydraulic Equipment Troubleshooting
Industrial Fluid Power Fundamentals
MFG202
MFG236
MFG214
Welding
Course
Course Code
Resistance Welding Inspection
Resistance Welding Technology
MFG229
MFG230
Manufacturing
114
Course
Course Code
Computer Numerical Control Fundamentals
Fundamentals of Predictive Maintenance
MFG217
MFG245
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
3-Week Courses —
Delivered over 3 months
Course Code
Lean Learning Academy
LEAN517
3-Day Courses
Course Code
Electrical Substation and Distribution Maintenance
Blue Sky and Master Scheduling
Lean Preparation Boot Camp
SAF-SFT108
LEAN503
LEAN516
2-Day Courses
Course Code
Influencing and Persuading Skills
Presentation Skills Development
Lean Fundamentals
PER602
PER604
LEAN501
1-Day Courses
Course Code
Industrial Hoist and Rigging Fundamentals
Pipe Identification and Labeling
Effective Performance Appraisal Delivery
Value Stream Mapping
Lean Launch Implementation
Lean Layout and Design
Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) Fundamentals
Standardized Work Implementation
5S/Visual Management Implementation
Process Problem Solving
Just-In-Time (JIT) Implementation
Quick Changeover Implementation
Kanban Integration
Error Proofing Implementation
Kaizen Implementation
MFG243
MFG223
PER603
LEAN502
LEAN504
LEAN505
LEAN507
LEAN508
LEAN509
LEAN510
LEAN511
LEAN512
LEAN513
LEAN514
LEAN515
* Information about these courses can be obtained from the
Training Services website at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 115
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
SAF-SEM
Machine Safety Seminar
2 Days
Course Purpose
This seminar provides students with the foundation to better understand current safety regulations. Students should learn how to review and recommend changes or
improvements to existing machine safeguards. Students should also learn how to reduce risk with machine safeguarding systems based on safety standards and risk
assessment. Students will also be presented with strategies to reduce safety issues that interfere with their machine uptime. In addition, students should understand
how to ensure their machine safeguarding will pass the next OSHA inspection.
Course Objectives
After completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:
• Identify the building blocks to a successful machine safety program, as well as
OSHA requirements and insights to compliance
• List key points of ANSI machine tool standards
• Employ basic risk assessment methodology
• Understand safety circuit design in compliance with ANSI and NFPA standards
including circuit reliability levels
• Apply general application knowledge relating to safeguarding of devices
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course, but basic experience in a plant
environment is recommended.
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• need to better understand the current safety regulations
• are being asked to review and recommend changes or improvements to
existing machine safeguards
• want to learn how to reduce risk with machine safeguarding systems based on
safety standards and risk assessment
• have machine uptime affected by safety issues
• are responsible for ensuring your machine safeguarding will pass the next
OSHA inspection
Difficulty Level
Beginner
SAF-SFT100
Lock-out/Tag-out Implementation
1 Day
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide students with proper lock-out and tag-out procedures. Using the OSHA Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR) you will learn
regulations on how equipment energy sources should be secured and disabled for safe entry and or maintenance practices.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will learn the following major
OSHA requirements:
• National OSHA regulations (Standards – 29 CFR)
• The Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock-out/Tag-out) – 1910.147
• Scope, application, and purpose
• Energy control procedure
• Lock-out/tag-out devices
• Periodic inspection
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who access energized and de-energized electrical equipment
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Working knowledge of electricity
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
115
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 116
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
SAF-SFT101
Electrical Safety Awareness
1 Day
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide students with hazard awareness and electrical safety training as required by OSHA and NFPA 70E. The main objective of
this program is to increase employee awareness of electric shock, Arc Flash, and Arc Blast hazards along with bringing your training program into compliance
with OSHA and NFPA 70E mandated electrical training and accident avoidance. During this course students will learn about NFPA 70E® electrical safety hazards,
safety requirements for employers, Arc Flash, personal protective equipment (PPE), locating specific requirements for energizing and de-energizing power
circuits, explaining the intent and limitations of PPE, locating a simplified approach to assure adequate PPE for diverse tasks, employing specific steps to be
taken to ensure an electrically safe work condition, and creating lock-out/tag-out procedures applicable to any given facility or activity.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Safety-related work practices
• Safety-related maintenance requirements
• Safety requirements for special equipment
• Installation safety requirements
• Arc flash ruling and hazard
• Protecting the electrical worker
• Operational voltage
• Applicable standards
• Arc flash hazard boundary terms
• Arc flash calculations review
• PPE selections
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who work on or near energized and de-energized electrical equipment
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Working knowledge of electricity
SAF-SFT106
NFPA 70E® – Arc Flash Awareness
1 Day
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide the student with an overall understanding of the current requirements of NFPA 70E-2009. A complete review of the standard
will be provided, along with a review of the calculation methods and tables used in the standard for establishing Arc flash boundaries and proper personal protective
equipment (PPE). This course will present review of NFPA 70E, calculating flash protection boundary, NFPA 70E Standards on PPE, and safe electrical practices.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Safety-related work practices
• Arc flash ruling and hazard
• Arc flash calculations review
• Flash hazard statistics
• Protecting the electrical worker
• Applicable standards
• Arc flash hazard boundary terms
Who Should Attend?
Individuals that require access to, or will be exposed to the work area designated
by the flash protection boundary
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Familiarity with fundamentals of electricity
• Proficiency in student’s respective classification
OR
• Enrolled in an up-grader/apprentice program
Job Aids Included
NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®, 2009 Edition
116
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 117
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
SAF-SFT110
Confined Space Entry Awareness
1 Day
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide the student with proper procedures for making entry into Permit Required Confined Spaces. This program of instruction will
prepare the participant to operate in the capacity of Entrant, Attendant or Entry Supervisor during confined space operations. Participants will become familiar with
CFR 1910.146 and how to properly employ the permit program. This course is a combination of classroom instruction and practical application in actual permit
spaces utilizing the appropriate Personal Protective Equipment, meters and ventilation. This course of instruction is required by OSHA (29 CFR 1910.146) before an
employee can enter a Permit Required Confined Space. A special emphasis is put on safety and non-entry rescue.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Confined space awareness and identification
• Key policy
• Definitions
• Responsibility
• General requirements
• Safety requirements
• Entry procedure
• Confined space permit form
Who Should Attend?
Individuals subjected to accessing or working around confined spaces in
the workplace
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Permit-required confined space permit review
SAF-SFT112
NFPA 70E – Electrical Safety and
Arc Flash Compliance
2 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will gain an in-depth understanding of the current requirements of NFPA 70E. A complete presentation of the standard will be provided, along
with examples and exercises covering the calculation methods and tables used in the standard for establishing arc flash boundaries and proper personal protective
equipment (PPE).
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• NFPA 70E electrical safety requirements
• Safe electrical practices
• Calculating flash protection boundaries
• Personal protective equipment
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for ensuring compliance with, developing training on,
or supervising employees who are required to work in accordance with
NFPA 70E
• Will be exposed to work areas designated by the flash protection boundary
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Familiarity with basic electricity.
Job Aids Included
NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®, 2009 Edition
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
117
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 118
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
SAF-SFT117
Lock-Out/Tag-Out Implementation
and Arc Flash Awareness
2 Days
Course Purpose
In this course, students will learn proper lock-out and tag-out (LOTO) procedures with electrical hazard awareness safety training as required by OSHA and NFPA 70E.
The main objective of this program is to increase employee awareness of proper LOTO procedures, electric shock, arc flash, and arc blast hazards and to bring
training programs into compliance with OSHA and NFPA 70E mandated electrical training and accident avoidance.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Arc flash ruling and hazard
• Operational voltage
• Flash hazard statistics
• Applicable standards
• Arc flash hazard boundary terms
• Arc flash hazard study and calculations review
• PPE selections (NFPA 70E)
• Over-current protective devices
• National OSHA regulations
• Lock-out/tag-out devices
• Periodic inspection and installation safety
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who work on or near energized and de-energized electrical equipment
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Working knowledge of electricity
Job Aids Included
NFPA 70E: Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®, 2009 Edition
SAF-SFT123
Plant Floor Arc Flash/LOTO/Confined
Space Safety
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course teaches students about the three significant safety areas most important to manufacturing applications and employee safety: lock-out/tag-out
implementation, confined space awareness, and arc-flash awareness. Students will learn proper lock-out and tag-out procedures using the OSHA Regulations (Standards
- 29 CFR). Students will also learn proper procedures for making entry into Permit Required Confined Spaces. Students will become familiar with CFR 1910.146 and
how to properly employ the permit program. Students will also gain an in-depth understanding of the current requirements for electrical safety and arc-flash hazard
awareness using the NFPA 70E. A complete presentation of the standard will be provided. Students will learn how to establish arc-flash boundaries and how to select
proper personal protective equipment (PPE).
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Understand permit-required confined space hazards
• Identify signs and symptoms of exposure
• Maintain an accurate count
• Understand NFPA 70E electrical safety requirements
• Understand safe electrical practices
• Calculate flash protection boundary
• Use personnel protective equipment
118
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for ensuring compliance with, developing training
on, or supervising employees who are required to access or be exposed to energized and de-energized electrical equipment, confined spaces, and, in accordance
with NFPA 70E, work in areas designated by the flash protection boundary
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Working knowledge of electricity
• Proficiency in student’s respective classification
• Enrolled in an up-grader/apprentice program
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 119
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
SAF-SFT120
2008 National Electrical Code (NEC®)
Change Awareness
3 Days
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to provide a detailed description of the 2008 NEC changes.
Course Objectives
This course will present the following major topics:
• Entire code, code-wide changes
• Introduction, Article 90
• General, Articles 100 – 110
• Wiring Design and Protection, Articles 200 – 285
• Wiring Methods and Materials, Articles 300 – 396
• Equipment for General Use, Articles 400 – 480
• Special Occupancies, Articles 500 – 590
• Special Equipment, Articles 600 – 695
• Special Conditions, Articles 700 – 770
• Communications Systems, Articles 800 – 830
• Tables, Tables 1 and 4
• Annex D
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to be trained on the 2008 National Electrical Code
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Familiarity with fundamentals of electricity
• A working knowledge of NEC
• Proficiency in student’s respective classification
OR
• Enrolled in an up-grader/apprentice program
Job Aids Included
2008 NEC Analysis of Changes
MFG213
Industrial Electrical Controls Fundamentals
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the knowledge and skills required to install, maintain and troubleshoot relays, motor starters, solenoids and other electromechanical
devices used for machine control. Students will be able to supervise and/or engineer the installation, maintenance and troubleshooting of electromechanical machine
controls, understand how to repair, maintain and troubleshoot relay-based machine controls, identify safety considerations, define an open and short condition, use test
equipment, and identify proper wiring and current electrical standards for a transformer.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Electrical fundamentals
• Electrical distribution
• Input and output devices
• Logic devices
• Disconnect devices
• Introduction to PLCs
• Schematic, logic and ladder diagrams
• Multimeter use
• Grounded and ungrounded control circuits
• Circuit troubleshooting
• Sources of electricity
• Electrical safety
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for operation of electrical controls
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Familiarity with basic electricity.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
119
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 120
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
MFG244
Basics of Electricity
1 Day
Course Purpose
This course provides students with basic electricity knowledge. Basic electricity theory is explored identifying component operations in energized and de-energized
states. Students will learn safety fundamentals and safe operation awareness.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will learn and understand the
following topics:
• Fundamental electrical concepts and terms
• Sources of electricity
• Variations of wiring devices
• Input devices, sensors and switches
• Output devices
• Multi-meter use
• Safety fundamentals around electricity
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who need to know basic electricity theory
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course.
MFG202
Industrial Air Controls (Pneumatic)
Fundamentals
3 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides the knowledge and skills required during the installation, maintenance and troubleshooting of pneumatic machine controls. Students will learn to
demonstrate good safety procedures when working with pneumatic and air controls and how to determine potential pneumatic hazards. Students will also be able to
explain the basics of pneumatic components, functions, and symbols and use pneumatic trainers to safely connect, operate, analyze, and troubleshoot sample circuits.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Pneumatic safety
• Physical vs. chemical state change
• Physical states of matter
• Pressure fundamentals
• Pneumatic terms
• Constituents of air
• Compressibility
• Pressure measurement facts
• Pneumatic transmission of energy
• Primary air treatment
• Common types of compressors
• Schematic symbols
• Pressure controls and operation
• Simple pneumatic system
120
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are maintenance engineers, supervisors, or other personnel
responsible for operation of pneumatic machine controls
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 121
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
MFG236
Industrial Hydraulic Equipment
Troubleshooting
4 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the knowledge and skills required to install, maintain and troubleshoot hydraulic systems. At the completion of this course, students
will be able to demonstrate best practice safety procedures, identify potential hydraulic hazards, describe the lockout procedure, discuss types and uses of hydraulic
fluids, use a hydraulic trainer to connect, operate, analyze and troubleshoot the operation of sample circuits. Students will also be able to identify proper name and
function of all hydraulic components, circuit action of failing components and indicators or manual valve operators that could be used to isolate failed components.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Hydraulic introduction
• Safety practices
• Pascal’s Law
• Fluid flow
• Hydraulic power transmission
• Accumulators
• Hydraulic pumps, actuators, and variables
• ANSI symbols
• Pressure constraints
• Reservoirs and valves
• Flow control methods and types
• Counterbalance and sequence circuits
Who Should Attend?
Individuals responsible for operation of hydraulically maintained and
operated devices
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Working knowledge of basic shop mathematics
• Familiarity with industrial equipment
MFG214
Industrial Fluid Power Fundamentals
5 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with the basics of pneumatically and hydraulically operated devices and systems found in modern industrial machinery and automation.
At the completion of this course, students will be able to match the pneumatic and hydraulic components name with it’s ANSI symbol, understand types and uses of
hydraulic fluids, identify significance of the presence or absence of foam on the surface of hydraulic fluid in the reservoir, and identify precautions during removal and
replacement of hydraulic components. Students will also be able to identify low control values, bypass, meter-in or meter-out flow control and location of filters, identify long-term symptoms associated with a lack of preventive maintenance of filters, heat exchangers, reservoirs and seals, and demonstrate good safety practices when
working with pneumatic and hydraulic equipment.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Physical world of a machine and states of matter
• Energy transmission using hydaulics and pneumatics
• Hydaulic and pneumatic safety
• ANSI symbols
• Control of hydaulic and pneumatic energy
• Pumps and compressors
• Air preparation
• Fluid conditioning
• Check valves, cylinders, and motors
• Directional and flow control valves
• Fluid conductors and connectors
• Simple pressure control valves
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Who Should Attend?
Individuals involved with pneumatic and hydraulic applications in the workplace
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Working knowledge of mathematics
• Basic familiarity with automated equipment
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
121
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 122
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
MFG229
Resistance Welding Inspection
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course is designed to increase knowledge and skills of students whose responsibilities include identifying the difference between an acceptable weld and
discrepant weld, which determines production stoppage allowing for maintenance or repair of the welding equipment. At the completion of this course, participants
will be able to identify a discrepant weld corrective action, identify variables in the resistance welding process that affect weld quality, perform destruct and nondestruct
test procedures, identify process standards, and indicate the safety, critical and ordinary welds on actual production parts and the weld engineering graphics.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Types of resistance welding
• Weld sequence and weld zone fundamentals
• Weld types
• Weld component factors
• Visual inspection
• Non-destruct inspection
• Destruct audit
• Safety weld inspection
• Corrective action
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for weld quality and assurance
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Basic understanding of hand tools
• Familiarity with resistance welding
MFG230
Resistance Welding Technology
4 Days
Course Purpose
This skill-building course provides students with the knowledge and skills to set up, maintain, and troubleshoot equipment used in the resistance welding processes.
At the completion of this course, students will be able to set up and troubleshooting weld controllers, determine weld schedules, identify types of coated steel,
identify causes of discrepant welds, describe how electrode size, shape and hardness effect electrode life along with weld consistency, and describe functions and
changes in the primary and secondary loops.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Resistance welding types and fundamentals
• Heat zone
• Weld sequence quality and types
• Weld component factors, time, and current
• Visual and non-destruct inspection
• Destruct audit
• Resistance welding machines and electrodes
• Power conversion equipment
• Welding controls and transformers
• Fluid power systems and cooling systems
• Spot weld indications
• Visual inspection
• Non-destruct and destruct test
122
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for weld setup, quality, and maintenance
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Completion of the Industrial Electrical Controls Fundamentals (MFG213) course
• Completion of the Industrial Hydraulic Equipment Troubleshooting
(MFG236) course
• Equivalent work experience
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 123
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
MFG217
Computer Numerical Control Fundamentals
2 Days
Course Purpose
This course provides students with knowledge of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) basic fundamentals applied to the production-machining environment. At the
completion of this course, students will be able to interpret basic G&M code programming determining cutter paths and program tasks, identify tooling and insert
types, determine the machine cube orientation, locate the various datum reference positions, identify the tool offset adjustment format, and categorize the closed
loop system format.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• CNC process and system basics
• Machine tools
• CNC feedback systems and programming
• Terminology
• Tooling
• Machine operating modes
• Cartesian coordinate system
• Reference positions
• Tool offsets
• CNC programming
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for CNC operations
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course.
Training - The Rockwell Automation Difference
• Subject Matter Expertise - Our technologies and our curricula
• Experienced Technical Instructors - Real-world application experience and product expertise
• Course Materials - Award-winning student materials
• Pre- and Posttesting - Assessment to quantify and demonstrate a return on investment
• Course Selection Tool - Knowledge assessments to help students decide which course is rght for them
• Workstations - Factory simulation tools for experiential learning
• Job Aids - Plant floor procedures and troubleshooting
• International Association for Continuing Education and Training - Authorized provider status
and CEUs for professional development
International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
123
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 124
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
MFG245
Fundamentals of Predictive Maintenance
2 Days
Course Purpose
The purpose of this course is to introduce and provide students with an overview of predictive maintenance and a basic understanding of the methods and
tools required.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, students will understand the following topics:
• Predictive maintenance programs
• Maintenance planning requirements & review Critical Path Method (CPM)
• Principles of vibration theory and analysis
• Basics of lubrication and analysis (Tribology)
• Basics of ultrasonic analysis
• Basics of thermographic analysis
• Principles of electrical insulation testing
• Inspection and performance measurement techniques
Who Should Attend?
Individuals who are responsible for maintaining facilities and equipment
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course.
Bring Training to Your Organization with On-Site Training Services!
Rockwell Automation on-site training can work in a
typical classroom environment or on the plant floor.
Receive these benefits with standard, on-site training:
• Flexible location - at your facility, in your training
center, on the plant floor
• Flexible schedule - any date, time, or shift that
works best for your employees
• Free pre- and post-tests that measure your
employees’ knowledge gain and demonstrate the
value of Rockwell Automation training solutions
• Dedicated instructor emphasizing hands-on,
job-related training relevant to your employees’
needs
• Training content adjusted according to employee
skill levels
• Training cost-savings - no travel expenses
• Standardized training - employees attend the same
training and learn the same information
124
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
To start your on-site training program,
call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or contact
your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 125
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
14_IQM Courses
Additional Courses Offered*
3-Week Courses —
Delivered over 3 months
Course Code
Lean Learning Academy
LEAN517
3-Day Courses
Course Code
Electrical Substation and Distribution Maintenance
Blue Sky and Master Scheduling
Lean Preparation Boot Camp
SAF-SFT108
LEAN503
LEAN516
2-Day Courses
Course Code
Influencing and Persuading Skills
Presentation Skills Development
Lean Fundamentals
PER602
PER604
LEAN501
1-Day Courses
Course Code
Industrial Hoist and Rigging Fundamentals
Pipe Identification and Labeling
Effective Performance Appraisal Delivery
Value Stream Mapping
Lean Launch Implementation
Lean Layout and Design
Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) Fundamentals
Standardized Work Implementation
5S/Visual Management Implementation
Process Problem Solving
Just-In-Time (JIT) Implementation
Quick Changeover Implementation
Kanban Integration
Error Proofing Implementation
Kaizen Implementation
MFG243
MFG223
PER603
LEAN502
LEAN504
LEAN505
LEAN507
LEAN508
LEAN509
LEAN510
LEAN511
LEAN512
LEAN513
LEAN514
LEAN515
* Information about these courses can be obtained from the
Training Services website at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
125
14_IQM Courses
5/6/2010
2:34 PM
Page 126
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
Make Training Choices with Confidence
Not sure if... a course is the right one for you?... is the right technical level?...
the content applies to your work?
The Rockwell Automation Course Selection Tool helps
you answer these questions and make confident
decisions about enrolling in Rockwell Automation
training courses.
To get started, access the Course Selection Tool at:
www.rockwellautomation/services/training
Then, select a course to begin your assessment.
All assessments are free and your results are
kept confidential.
126
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11/23/2010
9:02 AM
Page 127
Computer-Based
Training
15_Comp-Based Training
Computer-Based Training
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
5/10/2010
9:15 AM
Page 22
Computer-Based Training Curriculum Map
Networks
RSTrainer
for EtherNet/IPHardware and
IP Addressing
RSTrainer
for EtherNet/IPCommunications and
Diagnostics
RSTrainer for
RSLinx Software
9393-RSTENET1ENE
(9393-RSTENET1ENF)
9393-RSTENET2ENE
(9393-RSTENET2ENF)
9393-RSTLINX
(9393-RSTLINXENF)
EtherNet/IP Bundle
9393-RSTENETAENE
(9393-RSTENETAENF)
Visualization
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View
Machine EditionApplications and Displays
9393-RSTVMEPT1
(9393-RSTMEPT1ENF)
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000
RSTrainer for
ControlLogix
Fundamentals
RSTrainer
for RSLogix 5000
SoftwareProject Configuration
9393-RSTCLX
(9393-RSTCLXENF)
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
(9393-RSTLKPRJENF)
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 5 Software
PLC/RSLogix 5
SLC 500 Bundle
9393-RSTSLCALENE
(9393-RSTSLCALENF)
SLC/RSLogix 500
9393-RSTLX5
(9393-RSTLX5ENF)
RSTrainer
for SLC 500Hardware
Fundamentals
RSTrainer
for SLC 500Programming
Fundamentals
Spanish
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 SoftwareOffline Programming
9393-RSTSLCHENE
(9393-RSTSLCHENF)
9393-RSTSLCPENE
(9393-RSTSLCPENF)
9393-RST500OFESE
(9393-RST500OFESF)
Modular
Programming for
Machine Applications
RSTrainer for
Hydraulics
Other
NEW!
ABT-MODPROG
9393-RSTHYD
(9393-RSTHYDENF)
Self-Study Training Kit
128
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View
Machine EditionDrawing Objects
9393-RSTVMEPT2
(9393-RSTMEPT2ENF)
RSTrainer
for RSLogix 5000
SoftwareOffline Programming
5/10/2010
FactoryTalk View
Machine EditionBundle
9393-RSTVMEALL
(9393-RSTMEALLENF)
9:15 AM
Page 23
RSTrainer for
FactoryTalk View
Machine EditionInteractive Objects
9393-RSTVMEPT3
(9393-RSTMEPT3ENF)
RSLogix 5000
Software Bundle
9393-RSTLX5KALL
(9393-RSTLKALLENF)
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
(9393-RSTLKOFFENF)
RSTrainer
for RSLogix 5000
SoftwareOnline Monitoring
RSTrainer
for RSLogix 5000
Software-Motion
9393-RSTLX5KON
(9393-RSTLKONENF)
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
(9393-RSTLKMOTENF)
RSLogix 500
Software Bundle
9393-RST500ALENE
(9393-RST500ALENF)
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 SoftwareOffline Programming
RSTrainer for
RSLogix 500 SoftwareOnline Monitoring
RSTrainer
for RSLogix 500
Software-Documenting
and Searching
RSCompanion
for SLC 500 and
MicroLogix Processors
9393-RST500OFENE
(9393-RST500OFENF)
9393-RST500ONENE
(9393-RST500ONENF)
9393-RST500DSENE
(9393-RST500DSENF)
9393-RSCOMP500
RSTrainer
Enterprise Edition for
Student Manager
9393-RSTSMGRENF
Computer-Based Training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition Products
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
129
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:03 AM
Page 130
9393-RSTVMEPT1
9393-RSTMEPT1ENF*
RSTrainer® for FactoryTalk® View Machine
Edition (ME) – Applications and Displays
5 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to create and configure a human-machine interface (HMI) application. This course is
available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View Machine Edition
(ME). Students will learn how to create displays and tags, configure application settings, and import and export tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students
will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example FactoryTalk View ME applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Use the application explorer
• Create a new display
• Use the startup editor
• Use project settings
• Configure security options
• Use direct-reference tags
• Create new HMI tags
• Use HMI tags
• Import and export the tag database
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of FactoryTalk View ME
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
9393-RSTVMEPT2
9393-RSTMEPT2ENF*
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME –
Drawing Objects
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively add and animate basic drawing objects for graphic displays. This course is
available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME. Students will
learn how to add objects from the graphics library, arrange objects, and animate objects through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn about the various
settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example FactoryTalk View ME applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Understand drawing objects
• Understand object properties
• Arrange objects
• Add objects from the graphic library
• Use the object explorer
• Animate drawing objects
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of FactoryTalk View ME
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
• Completion of the RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software – Applications
and Displays (9393-RSTVMEPT1/9393-RSTMEPT1ENF) e-Learning training
course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended.
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
FactoryTalk View ME
and PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
130
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:03 AM
Page 131
9393-RSTVMEPT3
9393-RSTMEPT3ENF*
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME –
Interactive Objects
5 Hours
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Create push buttons
• Create display objects
• Create control list selectors, gauges, and graph objects
• Create display navigation objects
• Create local message displays
• Add advanced features to interactive objects
• Create parameter files and tag placeholders
• Test displays and applications
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
FactoryTalk View ME and
PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
Catalog #
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure interactive objects for graphic displays. This course is
available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach FactoryTalk View ME. Students will
learn how to create and configure interactive objects, parameter files, and tag placeholders through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the
various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example FactoryTalk View ME applications.
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of FactoryTalk View ME
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
- RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software – Applications and Displays
(9393-RSTVMEPT1/9393-RSTMEPT1ENF)
- RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software – Drawing Objects
(9393-RSTVMEPT2/9393-RSTMEPT2ENF)
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
9393-RSTCLX
9393-RSTCLXENF*
RSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals
®
20 Hours
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course provides students with an introduction to the ControlLogix control system. This course is designed to provide students with the
essential introductory information required when working with a ControlLogix control system. This course includes an overview of the Logix5550, Logix5555, and
Logix5563 controllers, I/O modules, communications modules, and motion modules. Students will learn how to navigate through RSLogix 5000 software and learn
about the four RSLogix 5000 programming languages. Through demonstrations, students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see
how to perform the required tasks for example control applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• ControlLogix hardware
• RSLogix 5000 software overview
• Module configuration (connections, module configuration)
• Tag structures (digital, analog, DeviceNet, DH/RIO)
• Programming (languages, project file, numbering systems)
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to identify, maintain, and configure ControlLogix hardware
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-DRG70
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
131
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 132
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
9393-RSTLKPRJENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix™ 5000 Software –
Project Configuration
5 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available in
both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how
to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will
also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Install RSLogix 5000 software
• Configure the display
• Navigate through the software
• Create and manage project files
• Configure a controller
• Organize tasks, programs, and routines
• Configure a local I/O module
• Produce and consume tags
• Export and import tags
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
9393-RSTLKOFFENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –
Offline Programming (also available in Spanish)
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available in
both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how
to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Through the
demonstrations, students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation
control applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Enter and edit ladder logic Elements
• Configure ladder logic display options
• Enter and edit function block diagrams
• Configure function block diagram display options
• Enter and edit structured text
• Configure the structured text display
• Verify project components
• Search and replace text
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
132
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSG50
ABT-1756-DRG70
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project
Configuration (9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF) e-Learning training
course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended.
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 133
9393-RSTLX5KON
9393-RSTLKONENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –
Online Monitoring
5 Hours
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Establish communications
• Monitor status
• Print a ladder logic routine
• Identify and correct faults
• Program ladder logic online
• Print a function block diagram
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSJ20
ABT-1756-DRG70
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively monitor and edit industrial control projects. This course is available in both
computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to
establish communications, monitor the status of a project, program ladder logic online, and identify and correct faults through step-by-step demonstrations. Students
will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
(9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF)
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
(9393-RSTLX5KOFF/9393-RSTLKOFFENF)
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
9393-RSTLKMOTENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –
Motion
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively program motion control applications. This course is available in both
computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to
configure servo modules, program motion instructions, and test and tune axes through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the various settings
and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example motion applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Configure the servo modules
• Configure the controller
• Add and configure a SERCOS servo drive axis
• Add and configure an analog servo drive axis
• Understand the motion instruction tag structure
• Compare immediate and synchronous instructions
• Test and tune an axis
• Use motion direct commands
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control
Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ52
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 motion
control software
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
(9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF)
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
(9393-RSTLX5KOFF/9393-RSTLKOFFENF)
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
(9393-RSTLX5KON/9393-RSTLKONENF)
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
133
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 134
9393-RSTLX5
9393-RSTLX5ENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5 Software
20 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course covers the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 5 project. This course provides information on how to install, configure,
and navigate through RSLogix 5 software. Students will learn how to transfer an RSLogix 5 project from a computer to the processor, document ladder logic, and
monitor data. Students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• RSLogix 5 software installation
• Screen layout, navigation, and help
• Offline programming (new project, ladder logic editing,
database documentation, reports, backup utilities)
• Online programming (communications, diagnostics)
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to use RSLogix 5 software to program, document, and
troubleshoot a PLC-5 application
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
PLC 5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1785-TSJ22
ABT-1785-DRG70
9393-RSTSLCHENE
9393-RSTSLCHENF
RSTrainer for SLC™ 500 - Hardware
Fundamentals
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course covers the fundamental principles behind the SLC 500 programmable controllers. This course covers the concepts,
terminology, and hardware of SLC 500 programmable controllers. Students will learn about various types of SLC 500 processors, hardware components,
communication options, I/O modules, and configuration through interactive simulations.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• SLC 500 family
• Chassis
• Power supplies
• Processors (SLC 5/01, 5/02, 5/03, 5/04, 5/05)
• Communication options
• Discrete and analog I/O modules
• Hardware configuration
134
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who are new to the SLC 500 series of programmable controllers
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 135
9393-RSTSLCPENE
9393-RSTSLCPENF
RSTrainer for SLC 500 - Programming
Fundamentals
7 Hours
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Memory organization
• Addressing (address types, indexed and indirect addressing)
• RSLogix 500 software overview
• Numbering systems
• Ladder logic programs
• Operating cycles
• Status file
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course covers the fundamental principles behind programming the SLC 500 programmable controllers. This course covers the concepts,
terminology, and basic programming of SLC 500 programmable controllers. Students will learn about memory organization, addressing, and ladder logic concepts
through interactive simulations. This course also provides an overview of RSLogix 500 software.
Intended Audience
Individuals who are new to the SLC 500 series of programmable controllers
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
9393-RST500OFENE
9393-RST500OFENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Offline Programming
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course provides information
on how to navigate through the RSLogix 500 software, create a new RSLogix 500 project, and enter ladder logic in a project. Helpful animations, background
information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practice
performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Navigate through the RSLogix 500 software
• Configure the display
• Create a new project
• Create program and data files
• Configure I/O modules in a project
• Enter ladder logic
• Copy, paste, and move rungs
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
135
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 136
9393-RST500ONENE
9393-RST500ONENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Online Monitoring
5 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for monitoring an RSLogix 500 project online. Specifically, this course provides
information on how to configure RSLinx communications, go online with the SLC 500 processor, edit ladder logic online, and configure and use data monitoring tools.
Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also
have the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Configure communications
• Transfer an RSLogix 500 project file
• Edit ladder logic online
• Monitor data
• Force inputs and outputs
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for monitoring RSLogix 500 projects
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following e-Learning training course or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
(9393-RST500OFENE/9393-RST500OFENF)
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
9393-RST500DSENE
9393-RST500DSENF*
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Documenting and Searching
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for documenting and searching an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course
provides information on how to use RSLogix 500 backup utilities, symbols, comments, database tools, and search functions. Helpful animations, background
information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practice
performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Use backup utilities
• Add symbols, address descriptions, instruction, rung comments, and page titles
• Use database tools and import/export a database
• Print reports
• Search a project
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
136
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
(9393-RST500OFENE/9393-RST500OFENF)
- RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring
(9393-RST500ONENE/9393-RST500ONENF)
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 137
RSCompanion for SLC 500
and MicroLogix Processors
9393-RSCOMP500
Course Purpose
RSCompanion for SLC 500 and MicroLogix processors is an interactive reference tool that can save valuable startup time. By helping users develop and document
ladder logic programs and assisting with installing and commissioning hardware, RSCompanion helps users make it all work together. RSCompanion can also be used
with RSLogix 500 ladder logic editing software.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will have a better
understanding of the following reference information:
• Processors
• Hardware
• Wizards
• Addressing
• Instructions
• Toolbox - software tools
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
ABT-1747-TSJ22
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Need fast access to addressing and instruction set reference information to
develop ladder logic programs more efficiently
• Need help with installing and commissioning SLC 500 and MicroLogix hardware
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Experience using RSLogix 500 software is helpful but not required
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
9393-RSTHYD
9393-RSTHYDENF*
RSTrainer for Hydraulics
20 Hours
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course is designed to teach students the fundamental concepts, principles, and equipment used in hydraulic systems. Students gain
knowledge about pumps, valves, actuators, and fluids that comprise hydraulic systems through detailed descriptions and animations. Problem-solving simulations and
troubleshooting situations help students learn about the operation and characteristics of various types of hydraulic equipment. This course is available in both
computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Basic functions and principles of hydraulic systems
• Pumps (gear, vane, piston)
• Valves (pressure control, flow control, check, directional control)
• Actuators (linear, rotary, hydraulic motors)
• Fluids (fluid oil additives, conductors, and fittings)
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to know components, functions, and basic operation of
hydraulic systems that include pumping, conducting, filtering, controlling, and
actuating
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
137
Computer-Based
Training
15_Comp-Based Training
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 138
9393-RSTLINX
9393-RSTLINXENF*
RSTrainer for RSLinx® Software
20 Hours
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This computer-based skill-building course covers material for users who want to take full advantage of the powerful monitoring, configuration, communication, and
diagnostic capabilities of RSLinx software. The skills students will learn will enable them to use RSLinx software for the acquisition of PLC data and to integrate the
display, archiving, and management of critical data. Students will learn to use RSLinx software to exchange data between Rockwell Automation hardware and
software products as well as Microsoft Office programs, third-party programs, or user-developed applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following topics:
• Driver configuration
• Diagnostic tools and utilities (network monitoring tools, configuration tools
and security, utilities: backup, restore, EDS hardware installation tools, etc.)
• Client application communications (DDE/OPC topics, Alias topics,
DDE/OPC diagnostics)
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for
Student Manager
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Have a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers
• Are interested in RSLinx software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Working knowledge of programmable controllers
9393-RSTSMGRENF*
Purpose
This software is a student tracking and reporting utility for use with the RSTrainer series of computer-based training courses. It provides similar functionality to a
learning management system by maintaining, recording, and managing student information for the RSTrainer computer-based training courses. This advanced
system maintains every student’s progress, scores, and personal information in an easy-to-use interface and database system that eliminates the burden of
manually documenting employee training information.
Software Capabilities
This software will allow the following information to be tracked for each student
completing the RSTrainer computer-based training courses:
• Passwords and log-on information
• Account and program access
• Progress
• Scores
138
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Training professionals, managers, or supervisors who maintain several students’
records and progress in a training program
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Products
All RSTrainer series of computer-based training courses
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 139
9393-RSTENET1ENE
9393-RSTENET1ENF*
RSTrainer for EtherNet/IP - Hardware
and IP Addressing
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course covers the fundamentals of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) hardware and IP addressing. During this course, students will
learn how to design and optimize an EtherNet/IP network and configure an EtherNet/IP driver and IP addresses for EtherNet/IP devices. Helpful animations, background information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Design EtherNet/IP networks
• Optimize and configure communications drivers using RSLinx
• Ping an IP address
• Configure and modify addresses using BOOTP-DHCP server software
• Configure and modify addresses using RSLogix 5000 software
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for designing EtherNet/IP networks
• Are interested in optimizing EtherNet/IP networks, configuring communications,
and configuring EtherNet/IP addresses
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
9393-RSTENET2ENE
9393-RSTENET2ENF*
RSTrainer for EtherNet/IP – Communications
and Diagnostics
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course explains the concepts of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) communications and diagnostics. During this course, students
will learn how to establish EtherNet/IP connections, send messages, and perform basic networking diagnostics. Helpful animations, background information, answers
to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
Course Objectives
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Configure an Ethernet/IP module in a local and remote chassis
• Configure a digital and analog I/O module
• Modify parameters
• Add a controller
• Produce and consume data
• Communicate between multiple controllers
• Access diagnostic information
• Configure the 9300-8EDM Ethernet diagnostic module
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for setting up communications over an EtherNet/IP network
• Are interested in understanding how to send messages over an EtherNet/IP
network, and perform basic networking diagnostics
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
* RSTrainer Enterprise Edition product
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
139
Computer-Based
Training
15_Comp-Based Training
15_Comp-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:04 AM
Page 140
Modular Programming for
Machine Applications
ABT-MODPROG
Computer-Based
Training
Course Purpose
This computer-based training course provides students with the skills and knowledge to produce a software design specification for a machine or line of machines. The
modular programming concepts in this course are derived from the ISA-88.01 industry standard and include the OMAC PackML state and data models as defined in the
ISA-TR88.00.02 technical report. The specification will follow modular programming guidelines and describe: equipment and control modules for controlling the
machine’s I/O devices, procedures for supervising and coordinating the modules, data structures for interfacing procedures with modules, state model for machine’s
overall operation, and naming conventions for software components. By using a modular approach to software design, software becomes much easier to reuse from
project to project. As the base of modular code increases, development time decreases. Additionally, the quality of the code increases because you can refine it each
time you reuse it.
Intended Audience
Course Objectives
• Control engineers who want to improve the efficiency of their software
After completing this computer-based training course, students will be
development process
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Plant engineers who need to integrate and maintain lines of machines
• Introduce modular programming
• Technicians and other maintenance individuals who need to interpret and
• Select modes and states
maintain modular software programs
• Break down states and equipment modules into steps
• Identify equipment and control modules
Difficulty Level
Beginner
• Organize unit procedures
• Define interfaces for procedures and modules
Prerequisites
• Implement modular programming tools and modular programming into
• First-hand knowledge of how your machines operate
RSLogix 5000™ software
• Able to organize data into programs and routines and create user-defined
data types in RSLogix 5000 software
• Able to write and program ladder diagrams in RSLogix 5000 software
140
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
11/23/2010
9:05 AM
Page 141
Web-Based Training
Web-Based Training
16_Web-Based Training
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
5/10/2010
9:16 AM
Page 24
Web-Based Training Curriculum Map
Fundamentals
of AC/DC Motors
and Drives
Automation Fundamentals
Networks
EtherNet/IPHardware and
IP Addressing
EtherNet/IPCommunications
and Diagnostics
RSView ME
Software-Applications
and Displays
Visualization
SLC/RSLogix 500
SLC 500 Hardware
Fundamentals
SLC 500 Programming
Fundamentals
General Industrial
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Now
Available
in Spanish RSLogix 500
SoftwareOffline
Programming
RSLogix 5000
SoftwareProject
Configuration
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000
142
PLC Fundamentals
Industrial
Electrical
Industrial
Mechanical
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
5/10/2010
9:16 AM
Page 25
RSView ME
SoftwareDrawing Objects
RSView ME
SoftwareInteractive Objects
RSLogix 500
SoftwareOnline Monitoring
RSLogix 500
SoftwareDocumenting
and Searching
RSLogix 5000
SoftwareOffline
Programming
RSLogix 5000
SoftwareOnline Monitoring
RSLogix 5000
SoftwareMotion
Industrial
Hydraulics
Industrial
Pneumatics
Mobile Hydraulics
Mobile Electrical
Web-Based Training – Available on Rockwell Automation University Online
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
143
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 144
Fundamentals of
AC/DC Motors and Drives
ePass/WBT1PACK
20 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course is a knowledge-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive concepts
and terminology. This course is instructionally designed to teach students the necessary fundamental knowledge and skills required to begin attending more advanced
installation, maintenance, and control courses. Students will learn to recognize AC and DC drive and motor hardware and functions through example drive applications.
This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be
knowledgeable about the following tasks:
• Recognize AC and DC motor hardware
• Recognize AC and DC drive hardware
• Monitor a drive using a HIM
• Recognize line protection and filtering device hardware and functions
• Recognize AC and DC motor braking methods
• Test a drive using electrical measuring tools
• Preform pre-power and power-on checks
• Select a drive for basic applications
Intended Audience
Individuals who are unfamiliar with the control of AC and DC motors and drives
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft® Windows® environment
• Understanding of basic electrical and electronic concepts
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary
Catalog #
ABT-D100-TSG10
ePass/WBT1PACK
PLC Fundamentals
20 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of important PLC principles and concepts. Students will understand how to connect to
PLC hardware and how they function in various control systems. Students will also study the various programming conventions, as well as practical issues about
automation controls and components.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics and tasks:
• What is a PLC?
• Comparison instructions
• PLC hardware
• Math instructions
• PLC numbering systems
• Sequencing instructions
• How is a PLC structured
• Specialty instructions
• How to program a PLC
• Practical issues
• Devices connected to a PLC
• Resources
• How to use timers
• Product support
• How to use counters
• Data handling instructions
144
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to understand the basics of programmable logic controllers
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1785-TSJ53
ABT-1785-DRG70
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 145
RSView® ME Software –
Applications and Displays
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Use the application explorer
• Use HMI tags
• Create a new display
• Import and export the tag database
• Use the startup editor
• Use project settings
• Configure security options
• Use direct-reference tags
• Create new HMI tags
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSView32 Procedures Guide
Web-Based Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to create and configure a human-machine interface (HMI) application. This course is
available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME)
software. Students will learn how to create displays and tags, configure application settings, and import and export tags through step-by-step demonstrations.
Students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Catalog #
ABT-9301-TSJ50
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSView ME Software – Drawing Objects
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively add and animate basic drawing objects for graphic displays. This course is
available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME)
software. Students will learn how to add objects from the graphics library, arrange objects, and animate objects through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will
learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Understand drawing objects
• Understand object properties
• Arrange objects
• Add objects from the graphic library
• Use the object explorer
• Animate drawing objects
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
• Completion of the RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays web-based
training course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended.
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSView32 Procedures Guide
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-9301-TSJ50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
145
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 146
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSView ME Software –
Interactive Objects
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure interactive objects for graphic displays. This course is
available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software.
Students will learn how to create and configure interactive objects, parameter files, and tag placeholders through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn
about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Create push buttons, and display objects
• Create control list selectors, gauges, and graph objects
• Create display navigation objects
• Create local message displays
• Add advanced features to interactive objects
• Create parameter files and tag placeholders
• Test displays and applications
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
- RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays
- RSView ME Software – Drawing Objects
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSView32 Procedures Guide
Catalog #
ABT-9301-TSJ50
ePass/WBT1PACK
SLC™ 500 – Hardware Fundamentals
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This web-based training course covers the fundamental principles behind SLC 500 programmable controllers. This course covers the concepts, terminology, and
hardware of SLC 500 programmable controllers. Students will learn about various types of SLC 500 processors, hardware components, communication options,
I/O modules, and configuration through interactive simulations.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• SLC 500 family
• Chassis
• Power supplies
• Processors (SLC 5/01, 5/02, 5/03, 5/04, 5/05)
• Communication options
• Discrete and analog I/O modules
• Hardware configuration
146
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who are new to the SLC 500 series of programmable controllers
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 147
ePass/WBT1PACK
SLC 500 – Programming Fundamentals
7 Hours
Course Purpose
This web-based training course covers the fundamental principles behind SLC 500 programmable controllers. This course covers the concepts, terminology, and basic
programming of SLC 500 programmable controllers. Students will learn about memory organization, addressing, and ladder logic concepts through interactive simulations. This course also provides an overview of RSLogix 500 software.
Intended Audience
Individuals who are new to the SLC 500 series of programmable controllers
Difficulty Level
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Memory organization
• Addressing (address types, indexed and indirect addressing)
• RSLogix 500 software overview
• Numbering systems
• Ladder logic programs
• Operating cycles
• Status file
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
(also available in Spanish)
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course provides information on
how to navigate through the RSLogix 500 software, create a new RSLogix 500 project, and enter ladder logic in a project. Helpful animations, background
information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practice
performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Navigate through the RSLogix 500 software
• Configure the display
• Create a new project
• Create program and data files
• Configure I/O modules in a project
• Enter ladder logic
• Copy, paste, and move rungs
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
147
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 148
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 500 Software –
Online Monitoring
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for monitoring an RSLogix 500 project online. Specifically, this course provides
information on how to configure RSLinx communications, go online with the SLC 500 processor, edit ladder logic online, and configure and use data monitoring tools.
Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also
have the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Configure communications
• Transfer an RSLogix 500 project file
• Edit ladder logic online
• Monitor data
• Force inputs and outputs
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for monitoring RSLogix 500 projects
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following web-based training course or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:
- RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 500 Software –
Documenting and Searching
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for documenting and searching an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course
provides information on how to use RSLogix 500 backup utilities, symbols, comments, database tools, and search functions. Helpful animations, background
information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practice
performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Use backup utilities
• Print reports
• Add symbols and address descriptions
• Search a project
• Add instruction, rung comments, and page titles
• Use database tools
• Import and export a database
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
148
Catalog #
ABT-1747-TSJ52
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1747-DRG70
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software
• Are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:
- RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
- RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 149
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 5000 Software –
Project Configuration
5 Hours
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Install RSLogix 5000 software
• Produce and consume tags
• Configure the display
• Export and import tags
• Navigate through the software
• Create and manage project files
• Configure a controller
• Organize tasks, programs, and routines
• Configure a local I/O module
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-DRG70
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 5000 Software –
Offline Programming
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available in
both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how
to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Through the
demonstrations, students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation
control applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Enter and edit ladder logic elements
• Configure ladder logic display options
• Enter and edit function block diagrams
• Configure function block diagram display options
• Enter and edit structured text
• Configure the structured text display
• Verify project components
• Search and replace text
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration web-based
training course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software
is recommended
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSG50
ABT-1756-DRG70
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
149
Web-Based Training
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available in
both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how
to install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will
also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 150
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 5000 Software –
Online Monitoring
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively monitor and edit industrial control projects. This course is available in both
computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to
establish communications, monitor the status of a project, program ladder logic online, and identify and correct faults through step-by-step demonstrations. Students
will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Establish communications
• Program ladder logic online
• Monitor status
• Print a function block diagram
• Print a ladder logic routine
• Identify and correct faults
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ControlLogix and RSLogix5000 Troubleshooting Guide
Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ50
ABT-1756-TSJ20
ABT-1756-DRG70
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 software
Difficulty Level
Intermediate
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
ePass/WBT1PACK
RSLogix 5000 Software – Motion
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively program motion control applications. This course is available in both
computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how to
configure servo modules, program motion instructions, and test and tune axes through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the various settings
and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example motion applications.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Configure the servo modules
• Configure the controller
• Add and configure a SERCOS servo drive axis
• Add and configure an analog servo drive axis
• Understand the motion instruction tag structure
• Compare immediate and synchronous instructions
• Test and tune an axis
• Use motion direct commands
Intended Audience
Individuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 motion
control software
Difficulty Level
Advanced
Prerequisites
• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
- RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
Related Job Aids Available for Purchase
Logix5000 System Glossary
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control
Procedures Guide
150
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSJ52
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 151
ePass/WBT1PACK
Industrial Electrical
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important electrical concepts. Students will understand basic physics laws
as they apply to electricity and basic electrical circuits. Students will also study the various components of electrical systems and how they function and interact with
each other.
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to understand basic electrical concepts
Difficulty Level
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Electrical fundamentals
• Circuit fundamentals
• Circuit analysis
• Basic magnetism
• Circuit components
• Electrical testers
• Schematics
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
ePass/WBT1PACK
Industrial Mechanical
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important mechanical concepts. Students will understand basic physics
laws as they apply to mechanical power and the systems in which they can be used. Students will also study the various components of mechanical systems and
how they function and interact with each other.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Basic physics
• Linear actuators
• Clutches
• Brakes
• Clutch/brake combinations
• Bearings
• Gears
• Drives
• Couplings
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to understand basic mechanical concepts
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
151
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 152
ePass/WBT1PACK
Industrial Hydraulics
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important hydraulic concepts. Students will understand basic physics laws
as they apply to hydraulic power and the systems in which they can be used. Students will also study the various components of hydraulic systems and how they
function and interact with each other. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Basic hydraulic physics
• Fluid conditioning
• Pumps
• Check valves
• Actuators
• Accessory components
• Pressure control
• Fluid conductors
• Directional control
• Schematics
• Flow control valves
• Basic system design
• Modular control valves
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to understand basic hydraulic concepts
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
ePass/WBT1PACK
Industrial Pneumatics
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important pneumatic concepts. Students will understand basic physics
laws as they apply to pneumatics, as well as understand schematics and system design. Students will also study the various components of pneumatic systems
and how they function and interact with each other.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Electrical physics
• Air line conductors
• Compressors
• Vacuum
• Air dryers
• Schematics
• Air preparation
• Air distribution
• Actuators
• Directional control valves
• Accessories
152
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who need to understand basic pneumatic concepts
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 153
ePass/WBT1PACK
Mobile Hydraulics
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This course delivers an interactive training experience covering the concepts needed to understand and work with the hydraulic systems of mobile equipment. Students
will learn various physics laws related to hydraulic power, as well as the hydraulic components and circuits associated with these systems. Students will study the
basics of hydrostatic transmissions, as well as valves and maintenance systems common to almost all combustion engine vehicles. Students will also study the symbols
and language of hydraulic schematics, helping them better understand their systems.
Intended Audience
Individuals who need a better understanding of mobile hydraulics equipment
Difficulty Level
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Fluid power physics
• Fluid conditioning
• Pumps
• Check valves
• Actuators
• Accessory components
• Hydraulic transmissions
• Fluid conductors
• Pressure control
• Schematics
• Directional control valves
• Flow control valves
• Modular control valves
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
ePass/WBT1PACK
Mobile Electrical
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This course delivers an interactive training experience to assist students in working with electrical systems of mobile equipment. Students will learn the various physics
laws related to electric power, as well as the electric components and circuits associated with these systems.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following topics:
• Electrical fundamentals
• Circuit fundamentals
• Circuit analysis
• Basic magnetism
• Circuit components
• Electrical testers
• Charging and starting systems
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Intended Audience
Individuals who need a better understanding of mobile electrical equipment
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
153
16_Web-Based Training
11/23/2010
9:06 AM
Page 154
ePass/WBT1PACK
EtherNet/IP - Hardware and IP Addressing
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced training course covers the fundamentals of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) hardware and IP addressing. During this course,
students will learn how to design and optimize an EtherNet/IP network and configure an EtherNet/IP driver and IP addresses for EtherNet/IP devices. Helpful
animations, background information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and
learning tools.
Web-Based Training
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Design EtherNet/IP networks
• Optimize and configure communications driver using RSLinx
• Ping an IP address
• Configure and modify addresses using BOOTP-DHCP server software
• Configure and modify addresses using RSLogix 5000 software
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for designing EtherNet/IP networks
• Are interested in optimizing EtherNet/IP networks, configuring communications,
and configuring EtherNet/IP addresses
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
ePass/WBT1PACK
EtherNet/IP – Communications and Diagnostics
5 Hours
Course Purpose
This interactive, self-paced training course teaches the concepts of Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) communications and diagnostics. During this course,
students will learn how to establish EtherNet/IP connections, send messages, and perform basic networking diagnostics. Helpful animations, background
information, answers to frequently asked questions, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools.
Course Objectives
After completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable
about the following tasks:
• Configure an Ethernet/IP module in a local and remote chassis
• Configure a digital and analog I/O module
• Modify parameters
• Add a controller
• Produce and consume data
• Communicate between multiple controllers
• Access diagnostic information
• Configure the 9300-8EDM ethernet diagnostic module
154
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Intended Audience
Individuals who:
• Are responsible for setting up communications over an EtherNet/IP network
• Are interested in understanding how to send messages over an EtherNet/IP
network, and perform basic networking diagnostics
Difficulty Level
Beginner
Prerequisites
Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 155
Workstations
Workstations
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 156
Training Workstations
Training workstations are the ideal tool to
reinforce and practice skills, train new
employees, and ease the transition from
one technology to another in a plant.
As a Training Tool. . .
Workstations can provide users with
hands-on maintenance, troubleshooting,
and programming experience using actual
equipment. Supplemental lab books can be
provided based on request.
As a Maintenance Tool. . .
Workstations
Workstations can be used to check modules
and practice troubleshooting.
As an Engineering Tool. . .
Workstations can provide users with operational
equipment for functions, such as application
simulations and prototypes.
156
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 157
As a Post-Training Refresher Tool. . .
Workstations can be used to practice, sustain,
and enhance individuals’ skills and
knowledge after completing
Rockwell Automation training courses.
Availability and Customization
New!
Training workstations can now be added to
Rockwell Automation Parts Management
Agreements, thereby giving you greater flexibility
and value. Ask your local Rockwell Automation
sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor for more
details.
Check Out These New Workstations!
ArmorStart Workstation
ABT-TDARMORDMC
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation
with SafeOff
PowerFlex 755 Workstation
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Lab Books
For practice exercises related to ControlLogix
SLC 500, Integrated Architecture, DeviceNet,
and Ultra 3000 workstations, these self-paced
maintenance lab books are available:
• Ethernet/IP Design and
Troubleshooting Lab Book
ABT-CCP178-TLB
• ControlLogix Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting Lab Book
ABT-CCP299-TLB
• ControlLogix Maintenance Lab Book
ABT-CCP153-TLB
• SLC 500 Maintenance Lab Book
ABT-CCPS43-TLB
• Introduction to Integrated Architecture
Lab Book
ABT-CIA101TLB
• DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration and
Troubleshooting Lab Book
ABT-CCP164TLB
• Ultra 3000 Digital Servo Drive Programming
Lab Book
ABT-CCN191-TLB
• Motion Programming Using Ladder
Logic Lab Book
ABT-CCN142-TLB
• FactoryTalk View SE Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Lab Book
ABT-CCV206-TLB
• FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Programming Lab Book
ABT-CCV204-TLB
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Workstations
If you are looking for hands-on, self-paced
instruction, Rockwell Automation workstations
are available for purchase within a variety of
technologies. Workstations can also be
custom-designed and configured to meet your
specific needs.
157
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 158
Workstation Builder
An easy way to design a workstation
Use the Rockwell Automation online Workstation Builder to customize a
training workstation by selecting your own components, simulation, and
accessories, and then submit the configuration to Rockwell Automation
for a quote.
Workstations
Features and capabilities with
Workstation Builder:
• Graphical, step-by-step, component
selection process
• Icon-driven navigation throughout the tool
for ease of use
• Viewable progress summary of your
selections
• Live chat, phone, and “contact us” links to
obtain answers to your questions
• Online Help providing explanations on
components and a link to technical product
documentation in the Rockwell Automation
Literature Library
• Links to special promotions, standard
workstation offerings, and other training
products and services
• Workstation recommendations and add-ons
based on your configuration
• Printable summary of the configured
workstation
Configure your ideal training workstation in
4 easy steps:
1. Select a platform
2. Select a model
3. Customize it
4. Print and submit for quote
Workstation Builder logically leads you step-by-step through several
categories of components to customize your workstation. However, default
selections are provided to identify Rockwell Automation standard
recommendations. The graphical interface helps you easily identify
workstation components.
158
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 159
Integrated Architecture Workstation
• Motion control hardware
- 1 M08SE Sercos interface module
- 1 Kinetix integrated IAM drive
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
Dimensions
Box 1
• Width: 22 in. (56 cm)
• Height: 31 in. (79 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 70 lb (32 kg)
Box 2
• Width: 21 in. (53 cm)
• Height: 29 in. (74 cm)
• Depth: 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight: 35 lb (16 kg)
Workstations
Configuration
• 0.5 Hp PowerFlex 40 AC drive
• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet-to-DeviceNet linking device
- 1 ControlNet Flex I/O adapter module
- 1 NETGEAR 5-port EtherNet switch
- 1 RightSight photoeye
- 1 tower light
• ControlLogix hardware
- 1 10-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 2 ControlLogix processor modules
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 1 EtherNet/IP bridge module
- 1 DeviceNet scanner module
• FlexLogix hardware
- 1 DC input/output combo module
- 1 analog input/output combo module
Catalog #: ABT-TDIA
Related Courses
• CIA101
Lead Time = 8 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley
distrubutor to check availability for immediate shipment.
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion (7-Slot Chassis)
Configuration
• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 1 DH+/remote I/O communications module
- 1 DH+ interface
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
- 1 7-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 2 ControlLogix processor modules
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX2
Compatibility
The ControlLogix Workstation can be used
with the Advanced Communications
Workstation (ABT-TDCLXCOM).
Dimensions
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight - 90 lb (41 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP143 • CCP146
• CCP152 • CCP153
• CCP710 • CCP711
Lead Time = 4…6 weeks*
• CCP151
• CCP154-LD
• CCCL21
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
159
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 160
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
and No Controller (7-Slot chassis)
Workstations
Configuration
• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
- 1 7-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX2NP
Dimensions
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight - 90 lb (41 kg)
Related Courses
All courses in the ControlLogix/Logix 5000
curriculum
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
ControlLogix Motion Ultra 100 Workstation
Configuration
• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 1 DH+/remote I/O communications module
- 1 DH+ interface
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
- 1 10-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 2 ControlLogix processor modules
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Motion control hardware
- 2 NEMA wiring arms
- 4 IEC wiring arms
- 1 motion module
- 2 Ultra 100 servo drives
- 2 Y-series motors
- 2 drive interfaces
160
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
(10-Slot chassis)
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX1
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Compatibility
The ControlLogix Motion Workstation can
be used with the Advanced Communications
Workstation (ABT-TDCLXCOM).
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
Dimensions
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight - 90 lb (41 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP143 • CCP146
• CCP152 • CCP153
• CCP710 • CCP711
• CCN142 • CCN190-LD
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
• CCP151
• CCP154-LD
• CCCL21
• CCN200
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 161
ControlLogix Motion Ultra 100 Workstation No Controller (10-Slot chassis)
Configuration
• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 1 DH+/remote I/O communications module
- 1 DH+ interface
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
- 1 10-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 1 DC input module
- 1 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Motion control hardware
- 2 NEMA wiring arms
- 4 IEC wiring arms
- 1 motion module
- 2 Ultra 100 servo drives
- 2 Y-series motors
- 2 drive interfaces
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Dimensions
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight - 90 lb (41 kg)
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
Configuration
• Network hardware
- 1 EtherNet module
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
- 1 10-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 2 ControlLogix processor modules
- 1 DC input module
- 2 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX1NP
(10-Slot chassis)
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX3
Dimensions
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight - 70 lb (33 kg)
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Note: This workstation includes a 10-slot I/O chassis and offers more
flexibility and expandability.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
161
Workstations
17_Workstations
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 162
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
and No Controller (10-Slot chassis)
Workstations
Configuration
Dimensions
• Network hardware
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
- 1 Ethernet module
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
- 2 ControlNet taps
• Weight - 70 lb (33 kg)
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
Related Courses
- 1 10-slot I/O chassis
All courses in the ControlLogix/Logix5000™
- 1 1756 system power supply
curriculum
- 1 DC input module
- 2 DC output module
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Note: This workstation includes a 10-slot I/O chassis and offers more
flexibility and expandability.
ControlLogix Motion Workstation
Configuration
• Network hardware
- 1 Ethernet bridge module
- 1 ControlNet bridge module
- 2 ControlNet taps
- 2 terminators
• Control hardware
- 1 10-slot I/O chassis
- 1 1756 system power supply
- 2 ControlLogix processor
modules
- 1 DC input module
- 2 DC output modules
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable
• Motion control hardware
- 2 NEMA wiring arms
- 4 IEC wiring arms
- 1 Sercos motion module
- 2 Ultra 3000 servo drives
- 2 TLY-Series motors
- 2 drive interfaces
162
(10-Slot chassis with Ultra 3000)
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX3NP
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX3K
• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated push buttons
- 2 potentiometers
- 2 analog voltmeters
Compatibility
The ControlLogix Motion Workstation can be
used with the Advanced Communications
Workstation (ABT-TDCLXCOM).
Dimensions
• Width - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Weight - 90 lb (41 kg)
Related Courses
All courses in the ControlLogix/Logix 5000 curriculum
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:38 PM
Page 163
CompactLogix Workstation
Configuration
• 0.5 Hp PowerFlex 40 AC drive
• Network hardware:
- 2 dual input and output push buttons
- 4 digital output pilot lights
- 1 analog input
- 1 analog meter
• CompactLogix hardware:
- 1 CompactLogix rack
- 1 system power supply
- 1 CompactLogix controller
- 1 digital output module
- 1 analog output module
• POINT I/O™ hardware:
- 1 Ethernet adapter
- 1 digital input module
- 1 Digital output module
- 2 dual input and output push buttons
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
Catalog #: ABT-TDIA-LITE
Dimensions (Box)
• Height: 24.1 in. (54.6 cm)
• Length: 20.3 in. (51.6 cm)
• Width: 12.8 in. (32.5 cm)
• Weight: 40 lb (18.2 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP298
Lead Time = 8 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
GuardLogix® Controller Workstation
Configuration
• GuardLogix primary controller
• GuardLogix safety partner
• 7-slot ControlLogix chassis
• ControlLogix power supply
• 8 dual discrete inputs/outputs
• CompactBlock™ I/O safety modules:
- 12 fail-safe inputs, 4 configurable standard semiconductor
outputs (test outputs)
- 8 fail-safe inputs, 8 fail-safe solid-state outputs, 4 configurable
standard semiconductor outputs (test outputs)
• Communication modules:
- EtherNet/IP bridge module
- DeviceNet bridge module
• Light curtain
• E-stop push button
• Patch connectors
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Workstations
17_Workstations
Catalog #: ABT-TDGRDLX1
Dimensions
• Width - 24 in. (61 cm)
• Height - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth - 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight - 58 lb (27 kg)
Related Courses
• SAF-LOG101
• SAF-LOG102
Lead Time = 8 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
163
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 164
GuardPLC™ Workstation
Configuration
• GuardPLC 1600 controller
• Distributed I/O expansion module
• Power switch
• 120V/220V plug receptacle
• E-stop push button
• 6 dual discrete inputs/outputs
• Patch connectors
• Hard-shell shipping case
Catalog #: ABT-TDGRDPLC1
Dimensions
• Width: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Height: 15 in. (38 cm)
• Depth: 8 in. (20 cm)
• Weight: 20 lb (9 kg)
Related Courses
• SAF-PLC101
• SAF-PLC102
• SAF-PLC103
Lead Time = 8 weeks*
Workstations
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
PowerFlex® 700 Workstation
Configuration
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 700 AC drive
• Remote I/O communications
• 120V AC operation
• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Programmable digital output
- User-configurable digital inputs
- 0…10V speed reference
- 0…10V analog output
• Digital programming terminal
• 1 Hp AC motor with encoder feedback
• Fault simulation switches
• User-accessible wiring terminals
Compatibility
The PowerFlex 700 Workstation can be used with the Fan Demo Unit
(ABT-TDPF700-FAN).
164
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700
Dimensions (Drive)
• Width - 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth - 17 in. (43 cm)
• Weight - 57 lb (26 kg)
Dimensions (Motor)
• Width - 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth - 12 in. (30 cm)
• Weight - 67 lb (30 kg)
Related Courses
• CCA161 • CCA162
• CCA163 • CCA164
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 165
PowerFlex 755 Workstation
Configuration
• 1 Hp PowerFlex 755 drive
• Communications carrier card (Used for installing 20-COMM
communication adapter module)
• 120V AC operation
• 1/30 Hp 230V induction motor with optical incremental encoder
(built into drive workstation)
• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Programmable digital outputs
- Programmable digital inputs
- 0…10V speed reference potentiometer
- 0…10V analog output
- User-configurable analog input
- User-configurable analog output
- Safe-speed relay with guard locking switch
- Safe-off 24V LED module with latch
• External 1 Hp motor with encoder feedback
(Optional: order separately)
• Unwired 1 HP PowerFlex 755 drive
(Optional: order separately using cat. no. ABT-TDPF755-MDRV)
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF755
Dimensions (Full Workstation)
• Width - 24 in. (61 cm)
• Height - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth - 16 in. (41 cm)
Approximate Dimensions
(Optional 1 Hp External
AC Motor)
• Width - 24.81 in. (63 cm)
• Height - 13.87 in. (35 cm)
• Depth - 13.87 in. (35 cm)
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Approximate Dimensions
(Optional 1 Hp PowerFlex 755 Drive)
• Width - 5.3 in. (13 cm)
• Height - 17 in. (44 cm)
• Depth - 8.35 in. (21 cm)
Related Courses
• CCA180
Fan Demo Unit
Configuration
• Vertical mounted fan and 400V AC motor
• Manual pressure damper
• Upstream air pressure transducer
• Motor connector and cable
• I/O connector and cable
• AC power cord
• 2 A fuse
• 4…20 mA output
Compatibility
The Fan Demo Unit can be used with the PowerFlex 700 Workstation
(ABT-TDPF700).
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Workstations
17_Workstations
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700FAN
Dimensions
• Width - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Height - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth -15 in. (38 cm)
• Weight - 25 lb (11 kg)
Related Courses
• CCA161 • CCA162
• CCA163 • CCA164
Lead Time = 6 weeks
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
165
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 166
1336 FORCE™ AC Drive Workstation
Workstations
Configuration
• 7.5 Hp 1336 FORCE AC drive
- Standard adapter
- 115V AC control interface
- DH+™ adapter
- English firmware
• 120V AC operation
• Drive operator panel
- Program digital output, run, fault, and alarm indicators
- User-configurable digital inputs
- External fault input
- Auxiliary 120V AC outlet
- 0…10V and 4…20 mA speed reference
- Start, stop, enable auxiliary, speed select, and speed inputs
- E-stop push button
• Enhanced hand-held programming terminal
• Graphic programming terminal
• PLC control system
- 4-slot I/O chassis
- PLC-5®/40 processor
- 2 1771-SIM I/O modules
- 1-slot power supply
• 3 Hp Reliance Electric AC motor with encoder feedback
• Hand brake load
• SCANport™ adapters
- Serial communications adapter
- Single-point remote I/O adapter
- Remote I/O communications interface
- Port replicator
• SCE (Saginaw Control and Engineering)
electrical enclosure on wheels
Dimensions
• Width - 36 in. (92 cm)
• Height - 60 in. (153 cm)
• Depth - 28 in. (72 cm)
• Weight - 650 lb (295 kg)
166
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Compatibility
IMPORTANT: The Drive Troubleshooting Box is not compatible with
a 1336 FORCE AC drive that uses a PLC processor adapter.
Related Courses
• CCA101 • CCA124 • CCA134
1336 IMPACT™ AC Drive Workstation
Configuration
• 7.5 Hp 1336 IMPACT AC drive
- Remote I/O communications
- 115V AC control interface
- Encoder feedback
• 120V AC operation
• Drive operator panel
- At-speed, run, fault, and alarm indicators
- User-configurable digital inputs
- Pulse and 4…20 mA speed reference
- Start, stop, enable auxiliary, speed select, and speed inputs
- Intelligent output
- E-stop push button
- Auxiliary 120V AC outlet
• 2 hand-held programming terminals
• PLC control system
- PLC-5/40 processor
- 2 1771-SIM I/O modules
- 4-slot I/O chassis
- 1-slot power supply
Catalog #: ABT-TD1336T
Catalog #: ABT-TD1336E
• SCANport adapters
- Port replicator
- Serial communications adapter
• 3 Hp Reliance Electric AC motor with
encoder feedback
• Hand brake load
• SCE (Saginaw Control and Engineering)
electrical enclosure on wheels
Dimensions
• Width - 36 in. (92 cm)
• Height - 60 in. (153 cm)
• Depth - 28 in. (72 cm)
• Weight - 650 lb (295 kg)
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Related Courses
• CCA101 • CCA132 • CCA133
• CCA135 • CCA138
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 167
1336 PLUS™ II AC Drive Workstation
Configuration
• 7.5 Hp 1336 PLUS II AC drive, including encoder feedback interface
• 120V AC operation
• Drive operator panel
- User-configurable digital inputs
- Analog option modules
- 4 programmable digital outputs
- 0…10V and 4…20 mA speed reference
- Start, stop, enable auxiliary, speed select, and 1336
PLUS II speed inputs
- E-stop push button
• Hand-held programming terminal
• PLC control system
- PLC-5/40 processor
- 2 1771-SIM I/O modules
- 4-slot I/O chassis
- 1-slot power supply
• 3 Hp Reliance Electric AC motor with encoder feedback
• Hand brake load
• SCANport adapters
- Single-point remote I/O
communications adapter
- Serial communications adapter
- Port replicator
• SCE (Saginaw Control and Engineering)
electrical enclosure on wheels
Dimensions
• Width - 36 in. (92 cm)
• Height - 60 in. (153 cm)
• Depth - 28 in. (72 cm)
• Weight - 650 lb (295 kg)
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Related Courses
• CCA101
• CCA137
Kinetix® 6000 Servo Drive Workstation
Configuration
• 2-axis power rail
• 120V AC operation
• Integrated axis module
• MP-Series motors
• Sercos card
• Fiber optic communication option
• Illuminated mushroom E-stop push button
• Integral surge suppression
• Auxiliary encoder
• Cable package
- Universal feedback cable
- Universal motor power cable
- Lo-profile I/O connector kit
- Lo-profile feedback connector kit
- Lo-profile auxiliary feedback connector kit
• Hardened electrical enclosure with wheels and carrying handle
Catalog #: ABT-TD1336F
Catalog #: ABT-TD20941 (120V AC)
ABT-TD20942 (230V AC, 20 A Service Connectors)
ABT-TD20943 (230V AC, 30 A Service Connectors)
Dimensions
• Width - 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height - 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight - 70 lb (32 kg)
Related Courses
• CCN142
• CCN190
• CCN200
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Compatibility
The Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation can be used with the
ControlLogix Motion Workstation (ABT-TDCLX1 plus 1756-M08SE module)
and fiber-optic cables.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
167
Workstations
17_Workstations
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 168
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation with SafeOff
Workstations
Configuration
• 2-axis power rail
• 120V AC operation
• Integrated axis module
• MP-Series motors
• Sercos card
• Safety I/O card
• Fiber optic communication option
• Illuminated mushroom E-stop push button
• Integral surge suppression
• Auxiliary encoder
• Cable package
- Universal feedback cable
- Universal motor power cable
- Lo-profile I/O connector kit
- Lo-profile feedback connector kit
- Lo-profile auxiliary feedback connector kit
• Hardened electrical enclosure with wheels and carrying handle
Dimensions
• Width - 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height - 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight - 70 lb (32 kg)
Related Courses
• CCN142
• CCN190-LD
• CCN200
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Ultra™ 3000 Servo Drive Workstation
Configuration
• MPL-A310P-MK22AA drive motor
• External encoder
• 120V AC operation
• UltraWare programming software
• DeviceNet communications
• Complete cable package
- Drive cable
- Feedback cable
- Power cable
- Serial cable
• Industrial hardened electrical enclosure with handle
Compatibility
The Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation can be used with the
ControlLogix Motion Workstation (ABT-TDCLX1 plus 1756-M08SE
module) and fiber-optic cables.
168
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #: ABT-TD2094SO
Catalog #: ABT-TD20981 (120V AC)
ABT-TD20982 (230V AC, 20 A Service Connectors)
ABT-TD20983 (230V AC, 30 A Service Connectors)
Dimensions
• Width - 22 in. (56 cm)
• Height - 9 in. (23 cm)
• Depth - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Weight - 33 lb (15 kg)
Related Courses
• CCN130 • CCN191-LD
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 169
ArmorStart Workstation
Catalog #: ABT-TDARMORDMC
Dimensions
• Width: 23 in. (58 cm)
• Height: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth: 15 in. (38 cm)
Configuration
• 24V VFD ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller
- DeviceNet communications
• Local CB Disconnect
• DeviceNet configuration terminal
• I/O capabilities:
- 4 DC inputs (sourced from DeviceNet power 24V DC)
- 2 relay outputs (sourced from control power)
Related Courses
• CCA190
Workstations
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Catalog #: ABT-TDPLC1 (120V AC)
Catalog #: ABT-TDPLC2 (220V AC)
1771 I/O Rack System Workstation
Configuration
• PLC-5/40 processor
• 12-slot I/O chassis
• Single-slot power supply
• Digital I/O modules
- 3 high-density 10…30V DC input modules
- 3 high-density 10…60V DC output modules
• Intelligent I/O modules
- 1 analog input module
- 1 analog output module
• 3 empty chassis slots
• Hard-shell shipping case
Dimensions
• Width - 30 in. (76 cm)
• Height - 21 in. (53 cm)
• Depth - 13 in. (33 cm)
• Weight - 70 lb (32 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP122 • CCP310-LD • CCP409
• CCP410 • CCP411 • CCP412
• CCPS65
Compatibility
The 1771 I/O Rack System Workstation can be used with the
Universal I/O Simulator (ABT-TDUIO1).
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Important: For I/O simulation, the 1771 I/O Rack System Workstation
must be used with the Universal I/O Simulator Workstation (ABT-TDUIO1).
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
169
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 170
Catalog #: ABT-TDSLC1 (120V AC)
Catalog #: ABT-TDSLC2 (220V AC)
1746 I/O Rack System Workstation
Workstations
Configuration
• SLC 5/04 processor
• 10-slot I/O chassis
• Power supply (5 A)
• Digital I/O modules
- 3 DC input modules (16 pt.) - sink 10…30V DC
- 3 DC output modules (16 pt.) - source 10…50V DC
• Intelligent I/O modules
- 2 analog combination modules
• Advanced interface converter
• Bulletin 800T E-stop push button
• Covered empty chassis slot
• Hard-shell shipping case
• Auxiliary AC power outlets
Compatibility
For I/O simulation, this unit must be
used with the Universal I/O Simulator
Workstation (ABT-TDUIO1).
Dimensions
• Width - 24 in. (61 cm)
• Height - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Depth - 13 in. (32 cm)
• Weight - 50 lb (23 kg)
Lead Time = 4…6 weeks*
Related Courses
• CCP122 • CCPS41 • CCPS42
• CCPS43 • CCPS45 • CCPS65
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Accessories (optional - not included with standard workstation)
• 1746 PID Simulation Kit
- Catalog Number - ABT-TDSLCPID
• Universal I/O Simulator Workstation
- Catalog Number ABT-TDUIO1
Catalog #: ABT-TDUIO1 (120V AC)
Catalog #: ABT-TDUIO2 (240V AC)
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation
Configuration
• Digital inputs
- 12 Bulletin 800A normally-open maintained push buttons
- 3 Bulletin 800A normally-open momentary push buttons
- 1 Bulletin 800A normally-closed momentary push button
• Digital outputs
- 16 Bulletin 800A push-to-test pilot lights
• Bulletin 800T E-stop push button
• Intelligent inputs
- 4 Bulletin 800T 10 kW potentiometers
• Intelligent outputs
- 2 DC analog meters (0…10V)
- 2 DC digital bar graph meters (0…5V)
• BCD inputs
- 1 four-digit BCD thumbwheel input switch (0…9)
- 1 four-digit BCD thumbwheel input switch (0…F)
• BCD outputs
- 2 four-digit BCD LED output displays
• Hard-shell shipping case
• 4 interface cables
170
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Compatibility
The Universal I/O Simulator can be used
with the following workstations (sold
separately):
• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)
• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
Dimensions
• Width - 25 in. (64 cm)
• Height - 21 in. (53 cm)
• Depth - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight - 70 lb (32 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP122 • CCP409 • CCP410
• CCP411 • CCP412 • CCPS41
• CCPS42 • CCPS43 • CCPS45
• CCPS65
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 171
ControlNet Workstation
Configuration
• Control hardware
- 1 1771 I/O chassis, 4-slot
- 1 1771 DC input module
- 1 1771 slot power supply
- 1 1771 SIM module
- 1 1771 high-speed counter module
- 1 ControlNet PLC-5 processor
- 1 1756 I/O chassis, 4-slot
- 1 1756 rack power supply
- 1 1756 DC input module
- 1 1756 ControlNet bridge module
- 1 ControlLogix controller
• ControlNet cabling system
• Flex I/O system
- 2 adapters
- 2 analog I/O modules
- 6 bases
- 2 DC output modules
Catalog #: ABT-TDCNET1
• Operator interface panel
- 8 illuminated push buttons
- 8 selector switches
- 1 potentiometer
- 2 DC volt meters
• 2 workstation enclosures
Dimensions
PLC-5 Unit
• Width - 32 in. (81 cm)
• Height - 26 in. (66 cm)
• Depth - 16 in. (41 cm)
• Weight - 108 lb (49 kg)
ControlLogix Unit
• Width - 26 in. (66 cm)
• Weight - 19 in. (48 cm)
• Depth - 24 in. (61 cm)
• Weight - 93 lb (42 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP170
• CCP172
DeviceNet Workstation
Configuration
• 2 terminators
• 3 T-port taps
• 2 open QuikLink taps
• 2 micro QuikLink taps
• 4 DeviceNet drop lines
• DeviceNet flat media
• ArmorBlock MaXum input module
• ArmorBlock MaXum base
• 2 DeviceNet proximity sensors
• E3 overload relay-phase and load modulators
• Absolute multi-turn encoder
• 1734-ADN Point I/O adapter
• 1734-ADN Point I/O DeviceNet adapter
- 3 Point I/O 4-pt. input modules
- 3 Point I/O 4-pt. output modules
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal with DeviceNet adapter
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Catalog #: ABT-TDDNET2
• Drive system
- 1 PowerFlex 40 drive
- 1 PowerFlex 40 DeviceNet adapter
- 1 AC motor
• ControlLogix system
- 4-slot chassis
- 1 power supply
- 1756-L63 processor
- Ethernet I/P bridge module
- DeviceNet bridge scanner module
Dimensions
• Width - 29 in. (74 cm)
• Height - 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Weight - 45 lb (20 kg)
Lead Time = 6 weeks*
* Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales
office or Allen-Bradley distrubutor to check
availability for immediate shipment.
Related Courses
• CCP164
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
171
Workstations
17_Workstations
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 172
EtherNet/IP Workstation
Workstations
Configuration
• 7-slot ControlLogix chassis with the following modules:
- Controller
- EtherNet/IP bridge module
- EtherNet/IP web server module
- DeviceNet scanner
- Digital input module
- Digital output module
• ControlLogix power supply
• CompactLogix™ chassis with the following modules:
- 1769-L32E controller
- 1769 digital input module
- 1769 digital output module
• 1794-AENT EtherNet/IP adapter module with a four channel
non-isolated analog output module
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
• Stratix 6000 switch
• 18 dual discrete inputs/outputs
• 4 selector switches
• 1 analog output meter
• 1 photoeye
• Hard-shell shipping case
Catalog #: ABT-TDENETIP
Dimensions
• Width - 30 in. (76 cm)
• Height - 21 in. (53 cm)
• Depth - 13 in. (33 cm)
• Weight - 45 lb (20 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP174
• CCP176
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Advanced Communications Workstation
Configuration
• ControlNet™ box
- PanelView 600 ControlNet terminal
- 4-slot 1771 I/O chassis
- 1771 I/O power supply
- PLC-5/40C processor
- 16-bit DC output module
- Analog output module
- LED display
- 1771 simulator module
- Hard-shell shipping case
• DeviceNet™ box
- PanelView™ 600 DeviceNet terminal
- Photo switch
- ArmorBlock® I/O
- RediSTATION operator interface
- Bulletin 160 drive with motor
- 1756-DNB (DeviceNet bridge) module
- Hard-shell shipping case
172
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #: ABT-TDCLXCOM
Compatibility
The Advanced Communications
Workstation can be used with the
ControlLogix Motion Workstation
(ABT-TDCLX1 plus 1756-M08SE module).
Dimensions
DeviceNet Unit
• Width - 32 in. (81 cm)
• Height - 24 in. (61cm)
• Depth - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Weight - 85 lb (39 kg)
ControlNet Unit
• Width - 33 in. (84 cm)
• Height - 22 in. (56 cm)
• Depth - 14 in. (36 cm)
• Weight - 95 lb (43 kg)
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 173
XM Workstation
Dimensions
• Width - 30 in. (76 cm)
• Height - 21 in. (54 cm)
• Depth - 11 in. (28 cm)
• Weight - 41 lb (19 kg)
Related Courses
• EK-ICM165
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Workstations
Configuration
• PanelView 600 DeviceNet terminal
• XM-500 DeviceNet to Ethernet Gateway
• XM-120 2-Channel Standard Dynamic Module
• XM-320 2-Channel Position Module
• XM-440 4-Output Master Relay Module
• LED display
• Five signal generators
• BNC connections
• Toggle switches
• Warning lights
• Port connections for DeviceNet and Ethernet communications
• Mini-USB connection on the XM-120, XM-320 and XM-440 modules
• ATA class shipping case
Catalog #: ABT-TDXM-VIB
Intelligent Motor Control Workstation
Configuration
• E1 Plus DeviceNet module
• PowerFlex 700 Vector, LCD HMI
• 24V AC/DC SMC™ Flex, controller
• SMC Flex DeviceNet module
• 2 N.O. selector switch, 2-position
• 3 multi-function LEDs, 2-position
Catalog #: ABT-TDIMC
Dimensions
• Width: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 15 in. (38 cm)
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
173
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 174
Intelligent Motor Control Workstation with XM
Configuration
• PanelView Plus 700
• 4-slot ControlLogix chassis:
- Logix5563 controller
- DeviceNet bridge module
- EtherNet/IP module
- Slot filler
• XM-121 Dynamic Measurement module
• Hirschmann Ethernet switch
• DeviceNet analog limit switch and limit switch lever
• 24V DeviceNet I/O block, 8-input
• N.O. 2 selector switch, 2-position
Catalog #: ABT-TDIMCXM
Dimensions
• Width: 28 in. (71 cm)
• Height: 20 in. (51 cm)
• Depth: 15 in. (38 cm)
Workstations
Lead Time = 6 weeks
IntelliCENTER Workstation
Configuration
• Flywheel and protective cover
• Load rheostat with knob
• Simpson 1257 analog load meter
• 2-position selector, NEMA/MCS
• NEMA starter with E3 overload relay
• MCC operator station with Hand/Off/Auto selector, red RUN lamp,
and Start/Stop push buttons
• MCC disconnect handle simulator with 802A-C33P4-S7 limit switch
• IEC contactor with 193 overload relay
• DeviceNet contactor interface
• 3-position Hand/Off/Auto selector
• Red run lamp
• Surface mount DeviceNet connectors
174
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #: ABT-TDINTCENTER
Related Courses
• CCI105-LD
• CCI106-LD
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:39 PM
Page 175
Process Workstation
Fieldbus Workstation Configuration
• Endress & Hauser pressure transmitter
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus linking device
Dimensions (HART Workstation)
• Width: 32 in. (81 cm)
• Height: 26 in. (66 cm)
• Depth: 16 in. (41 cm)
Dimensions (Fieldbus Workstation)
• Width: 19 in. (48 cm)
• Height: 14 in. (36 cm)
• Depth: 7 in. (18 cm)
Related Courses
• PRS013
• PRS014
Workstations
HART Workstation Configuration
• 4-slot ControlLogix chassis:
- Logix5563 Controller
- EtherNet/IP bridge module
- HART module
- ControlNet redundant module
• Endress & Hauser temperature transmitter
• Stratix Ethernet switch, 5-port
• Flex I/O
- Flex I/O adapter
- Flex I/O digital combo module
- Flex I/O analog combo module
Catalog #: ABT-TDPROCESS
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Catalog #: ABT-TDPV600TCO1
PanelView 600 Workstation
Configuration
• PanelView 600 terminal
• Keypad operation and touch operation
• Data Highway Plus
• Serial interface cable
• Hard-shell shipping case (capacity to hold two
PanelView 600 terminals)
Compatibility
The PanelView 600 Workstation can be used with the following
workstations:
• ControlLogix (ABT-TDCLX1 or ABT-TDCLX2)
• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)
• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Dimensions
• Width - 12 in. (30 cm)
• Height - 8 in. (20 cm)
• Depth - 5 in. (13 cm)
• Weight - 5 lb (2 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP196
• CCPS45
Lead Time = 4 weeks
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
175
17_Workstations
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 176
PanelView 1000 Workstation
Configuration
• PanelView 1000 terminal (2711-T10C8)
• Keypad and touch operation
• Data Highway Plus™ interface
• Serial interface cable
• Hard-shell shipping case
Compatibility
The PanelView 1000 Workstation can be used with the following
workstations:
• ControlLogix (ABT-TDCLX1 or ABT-TDCLX2)
• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)
• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
Catalog #: ABT-TDPV1000TC01
Dimensions
• Width - 17 in. (43 cm)
• Height - 12 in. (30 cm)
• Depth - 5 in. (13 cm)
• Weight - 9 lb (4 kg)
Related Courses
• CCP196
Lead Time = 4 weeks
Workstations
PanelView Plus Workstation
Configuration
• PanelView Plus terminal keypad and touch operation
(2711-P-B10C6B1)
• DH+, RIO, DH-485
• Serial Interface cable
• Hard-shell shipping case
Compatibility
The PanelView Plus Workstation can be used with the following
workstations:
• ControlLogix (ABT-TDCLX1 or ABT-TDCLX2)
• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)
• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
176
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Catalog #: ABT-TDPVPLUSTC01
Dimensions
• Width - 13 in. (33 cm)
• Height - 10 in. (25 cm)
• Depth - 3 in. (8 cm)
• Weight - 6 lb (3 kg)
Related Courses
• CCV202
• CCV203
Lead Time = 4 weeks
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 177
Job Aids
Job Aids
18_Job Aids
18_Job Aids
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 178
Job Aids
Rockwell Automation recognizes that one of the keys
to superior performance on-the-job is the ability to
become efficient and highly effective using support
resources. Rockwell Automation award-winning job
aids provide essential job task information, thereby
minimizing errors that can occur at the
most inopportune moments. Job
aids provide immediate hardware
and software information when it
is needed so production does not
slow. Our job aids are written at a
level of detail to ensure that you
are consistently using best
practices. The right job aid can
make the difference between
productive time and downtime
and between maximum
performance and minimum
operation.
Job Aids
Standard Guides
Standard job aids are designed to assist
individuals with software and hardware job
tasks. While these tools are very good at covering
tasks associated with Rockwell Automation hardware
components, they are not designed to take into
consideration every possible custom system
configuration or state.
Custom Guides
Custom guides are designed and developed to work
with plant-specific systems and applications.
Common operator-related hardware and software
errors can be eliminated by using custom designed
procedures and guides. Rockwell Automation can
assist you with the design and creation of the guides
you need to achieve maximum efficiency and
minimize operator-related errors. Contact your local
Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley
distributor to discuss creating custom guides for your
needs.
178
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Glossaries
Glossaries provide an alphabetized listing of common
terminology and definitions as it relates to a specific
technology. Glossaries help users become more
familiar with technical terms and concepts needed
to understand a technology.
Job Aid
Catalog #
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary
Logix5000™ Systems Glossary
Motion Control Glossary
ABT-D100-TSG10
ABT-1756-TSG10
ABT-M100-TSG10
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
18_Job Aids
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 179
Procedures Guides
Procedures guides provide detailed
step-by-step instructions on the
most common software and
hardware-related job tasks
that help users to
program, configure,
troubleshoot, and test
Rockwell Automation
control equipment.
Features
• Step-by-step directions for job-specific tasks
• Best practices and standard guidelines
• Tips on software-related shortcuts
and special features
• Safety reminders and warnings
• Glossary of key software and hardware terms
• Appendices of basic Microsoft® Windows®
operations
Job Aid
1395 Drive Installation Guide
ControlNet™ and RSNetWorx™ Procedures Guide
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - Portuguese
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - Spanish
DeviceNet™ and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - German
DriveExplorer™ Procedures Guide
DriveTools™ Procedures Guide
DriveTools Procedures Guide - Dutch
EtherNet/IP Procedures Guide
GML™ and 1394 Procedures Guide
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide - German
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide - Portuguese
GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide - Spanish
MicroLogix™ 1000 Procedures Guide
PanelView™ 300/550/600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder™32 Procedures Guide
PanelView 1000e/1200e/1400e and
Panel Builder 1400e Configuration Procedures Guide
PLC-2® and 6200 Series Procedures Guide
PLC-5® and 6200 Series Procedures Guide
PLC-5 and 6200 Series Procedures Guide - Spanish
PLC-5 and A.I. Series Procedures Guide
PLC-5 and A.I. Series Procedures Guide - Spanish
Procedures eGuide for RSLogix™ 500
ProcessLogix™ Configuration Procedures Guide
ProcessLogix Operators Procedures Guide
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Catalog #
ABT-1395-TSH50
ABT-N200-TSJ50
ABT-N200-TSJ50PT
ABT-N200-TSJ50ES
ABT-N100-TSJ50
ABT-N100-TSJ50DE
ABT-D500-TSJ51
ABT-D500-TSJ50
ABT-D500-TSJ50NL
ABT-N300-TSJ50
ABT-4100-TSJ50
ABT-4100-TSJ51
ABT-4100-TSJ51DE
ABT-4100-TSJ51PT
ABT-4100-TSJ51ES
ABT-1761-TSJ50
ABT-2711-TSJ50
ABT-2711E-TSJ50
ABT-1772-TSJ80
ABT-1785-TSJ50
ABT-1785-TSJ50ES
ABT-1785-TSJ51
ABT-1785-TSJ51ES
9393-EGLX500
ABT-1757-TSJ50
ABT-1757-TSJ51
Catalog #
PowerFlex® 700 Standard and Vector Control
Procedures Guide
ABT-20B-TSJ50
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1785-TSJ53
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - French
ABT-1785-TSJ53FR
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Italian
ABT-1785-TSJ53IT
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Portuguese
ABT-1785-TSJ53PT
RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-1785-TSJ53ES
RSLogix 500 and SLC™ 500 Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ52
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Dutch
ABT-1747-TSJ52NL
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Portuguese ABT-1747-TSJ52PT
RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-1747-TSJ52ES
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000
Motion Control Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ52
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ50
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide - Italian ABT-1756-TSJ50IT
RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide - SpanishABT-1756-TSJ50ES
RSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC™ Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50
RSView®32 Procedures Guide
ABT-9301-TSJ50
®
FactoryTalk View ME and
PanelView Plus Procedures Guide
ABT-2711P-TSJ50
FactoryTalk View ME and
PanelView Plus Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-2711P-TSJ50ES
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
FactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide - Spanish
ABT-9701SE-TSJ50ES
SLC 500 and A.I. Series Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ51
SLC 500 and APS Procedures Guide
ABT-1747-TSJ50
™
SoftLogix 5 Procedures Guide
ABT-1789-TSJ50
Ultra™ Master and 1398 Procedures Guide
ABT-1398-TSJ50
™
ABT-1785-TSJ52
WINtelligent LOGIC 5 Procedures Guide
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
179
Job Aids
Job Aid
18_Job Aids
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 180
Troubleshooting Guides
Rockwell Automation
troubleshooting guides contain
flowcharts that walk you through
faults that can occur on a system.
These guides are specifically
designed for use on the plant floor
and their pocket-size design allows for
easy portability. Troubleshooting guides
are filled with procedures, error code
information, and status indicator listings with
recommended actions, reference charts,
and hardware/software diagrams.
Job Aid
Catalog #
Job Aids
1336 PLUS™ II Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1336F-TSJ20
1394 and GML Commander Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1394-TSJ21
ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-1756-TSJ20
ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000
Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese
ABT-1756-TSJ20PT
ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000
Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish
ABT-1756-TSJ20ES
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N200-TSJ20
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-N200-TSJ20ES
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide
ABT-N100-TSJ20
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx
Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese
ABT-N100-TSJ20PT
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx
Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish
ABT-N100-TSJ20ES
180
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Features
• Detailed illustrations with pertinent
troubleshooting information
• Location indicators where action is needed or
where possible problems exist
• Consistent starting point from which to logically
begin troubleshooting
• Logical progression of questions, causes, and
actions to determine the problem
• Important safety considerations, precautions,
and general warnings
Job Aid
Catalog #
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide - Dutch
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Troubleshooting Guide
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Troubleshooting Guide - Dutch
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500
Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish
ABT-1785-TSJ22
ABT-1785-TSJ22NL
ABT-1785-TSJ22PT
ABT-20B-TSJ20
ABT-1747-TSJ22
ABT-1747-TSJ22NL
ABT-1747-TSJ22ES
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 181
Documentation Reference Guide CDs
Documentation reference guide CDs contain excerpts
of the most frequently used product information from
several technical manuals. By consolidating technical
product content on one CD, users can find important
information faster.
Job Aid
Catalog #
1336 IMPACT™ Documentation Reference Guide CD
1336 PLUS and PLUS II Documentation
Reference Guide CD
1397 Drive Documentation Reference Guide CD
8200 Lathe/Mill Reference Guide CD
8600 MC/TC Asset Reference Guide CD
8600 MC/TC Operators Reference Guide CD
ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD
EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD
GuardLogix® Documentation Reference Guide CD
GuardPLC™ Documentation Reference Guide CD
Logix5000™ Documentation Reference Guide CD
PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD
PowerFlex DC Drives Documentation Reference Guide CD
PowerFlex 700S Documentation Reference Guide CD
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Documentation
Reference Guide CD
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Documentation Reference Guide CD
SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD
ABT-1336E-DRG70
ABT-1336SF-DRG70
ABT-1397-DRG70
ABT-8000-TQR91
ABT-8600-TQR92
ABT-8600-TQR91
ABT-N200-DRG70
ABT-N100-DRG70
ABT-N300-DRG70
ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
ABT-1753-DRG70
ABT-1756-DRG70
ABT-1785-DRG70
ABT-20P-DRG70
ABT-20D-DRG70
ABT-20D-DRG71
ABT-20AB-DRG70
ABT-1747-DRG70
Quick Reference Guides
Quick reference guides provide hardware and
software specific information that users can quickly
reference when configuring Rockwell Automation
equipment. Parameter-specific information can
typically be found in a quick reference guide.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Job Aid
Catalog #
1336 Drive Quick Reference Card
1336 IMPACT Quick Reference Guide
1336 PLUS and PLUS II Quick Reference Guide
1336 PLUS Quick Reference Guide
1397 Drives Quick Reference Guide
CNC™ 9/Series Quick Reference Guide
IMC 120, 121, 123 Quick Reference Guide
IMC-S Quick Reference Guide
PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control
Quick Reference Guide
Ultra 100 Series Parameter
Quick Reference Guide
ABT-1336-TQR90
ABT-1336E-TQR90
ABT-1336SF-TQR90
ABT-1336S-TQR93
ABT-1397-TQR90
ABT-8520-TQR10
ABT-1771-TQR10
ABT-4100-TQR10
ABT-20AB-TQR90
ABT-1398-TQR90
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
181
Job Aids
18_Job Aids
18_Job Aids
5/6/2010
2:40 PM
Page 182
REFRESH
Improve Job Skills Through Self-Study
Self-Paced Learning
Do you find it difficult to schedule training for your staff?
Are you trying to cut down on the additional expenses
associated with training?
Delivered via the Web or CD-ROM, we have the
e-learning course for your needs. From basic industrial to
Rockwell Automation specific content, the RSTrainer and
Rockwell Automation University Online courses provide
introductory and refresher training.
Courses are available in these areas:
Job Aids
• General Industrial
• Automation Fundamentals
• Controllers - ControlLogix, SLC, and PLC
• Motion
• Visualization (Human Machine Interface)
To download a demo of
computer-based training, go to:
www.rockwellautomation.com/
services/training/demo.html
Sign up now for a free 5-day trial
of our web-based training at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/
services/training/webbased.html
182
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
19_Savings Program
5/6/2010
2:41 PM
Page 183
Savings Program
Savings Program
19_Savings Program
5/6/2010
2:41 PM
Page 184
Training Voucher Account
Maximize Your Training Budget
The award-winning Rockwell Automation training
portfolio provides a wide-range of performance-based
products and services that can be purchased using
your Training Voucher Account. As a program
participant, you receive a Training Voucher Card with
a pre-purchased quantity of vouchers in your account.
The vouchers can be redeemed at any time within one
year for a variety of Rockwell Automation
training courses, products, and services.
Benefits:
• A single purchase for all your
training needs
• Savings up to 20% off your purchase
• Monthly statements
• Convenient web account tracking
• Easy budgeting and purchasing
• Redeemable for one year on any
training offering
Voucher Quantity
20-39
40+
Savings
up to 14%
20%
Savings Program
A Single Investment Redeemable For:
Instructor-Led Training
• Standard Courses - over 250 open-enrollment
classes from our schedule
• Tailored Courses - combined lessons on job tasks
from over 1600 learning modules
• Custom Courses - specifically designed to
meet your training needs
• On-Site Courses - private courses at your facility
or another convenient location
• Certification Program - curriculum to demonstrate
mastery of Rockwell Automation technologies
• Test Services - knowledge-based assessments
before and after training
Self-Paced Training: e-learning
• Computer-Based Training - RSTrainer Series
• Web-Based Training - Rockwell Automation
University Online
Workstations
• Skill-building simulators for many
Rockwell Automation technologies
Job Aids
• Troubleshooting guides
• Procedure guides
• Quick reference guides
• Documentation reference guide CDs
Integrated Performance Assessments
• Assessment, gap analysis, reporting, and employee
development recommendations
Note: Special rules apply for volume discounted ePasses,
sales promotions, previously discounted items,
general industrial training, and custom/negotiated
training.
To register for standard (open-enrollment) training
courses using vouchers, visit:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
For more details about this program, contact your
local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor.
184
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
20_Certificate Program
5/6/2010
2:41 PM
Page 185
Certificate Program
Certificate Programs
20_Certificate Program
5/6/2010
2:41 PM
Page 186
Certificate Programs
New ControlLogix and Drives
Certificate Programs
Program Rewards:
Apply ControlLogix and drives technology to help
improve the quality, efficiency, and productivity of
your plant systems.
• Recognition Award - Certificate of Achievement
• Custom Rockwell Automation polo
shirt with Certificate logo
The ControlLogix and Drives Certificate Programs
are intended for maintenance and programming
professionals who want to develop their knowledge and skills using the latest technology. This
program combines a number of up-to-date training
courses.
You can choose to complete one or both of the
Certificate Programs. As a certificate candidate,
you will follow a series of Rockwell Automation
training courses offering practical, hands-on
exercises and end with a final assessment.
Participants will be trained on ControlLogix or
drives skills and competencies, they will
understand theoretical concepts, and learn to
maintain and/or program ControlLogix or drives
equipment. Depending on the combination of
training courses followed, it will lead you to the
desired level and type of certificate.
Certificate Program
Upon completion of the program requirements,
please contact your local Rockwell Automation
training coordinator to review your training
record. Once approved, you will be given access
to the online, web-based assessment (fee
requirement), the final step leading to your
Certificate of Achievement. A passing score on the
assessment will entitle you to the rewards and
benefits of the Certificate Program you completed.
186
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Program Value-Add:
• Job aids
• Continuing education units
• Tools to maintain skills and knowledge:
- CompactLogix starter workstation
(available with specific ControlLogix courses)
- e-Learning discount coupon (available with
ControlLogix certificate program courses
only)
- Training discount coupon
Benefits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Competency
Recognition
Knowledge assessment
Competitive edge
Education credits
Improved on-the-job skills
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
5/6/2010
3:02 PM
Page 27
ControlLogix Maintainer Certificate Curriculum
Core Courses
Option 1
Core Courses
Option 2
Elective Courses
(Choose 1 Course)
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix System
Fundamentals
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
CCP146
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CIA101
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CIA101
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
CCP299 4.5 Days
3.2 CEUs
CCN130
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
ControlLogix
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
Kinetix 6000 Level 4:
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP153
4 Days
2.8 CEUs
CCCL21
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCN200
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCCL21
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Choose 1
ControlLogix
Elective Course
Assessment
Core Courses Option 1
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Choose 1
ControlLogix
Elective Course
Motion Control
Fundamentals
GuardLogix
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
SAF-LOG102
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Note: CCP146 may be replaced with CIA101 if you
have already completed the
Fundamentals course.
No other substitutions
are permitted.
Assessment
Core Courses Option 2
Elective Courses
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
187
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
5/6/2010
3:02 PM
Page 28
ControlLogix Programmer Certificate Curriculum
Elective Courses
(Choose 1 Course)
Core Courses
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix
Fundamentals and
Troubleshooting
Introduction to
Automation and
Integrated Architecture
CCP146
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCP299
4.5 Days
3.2 CEUs
CIA101
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:
Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
PhaseManager
Project Design
GuardLogix
Application
Development
CCP151
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCP711
1 Day
.7 CEUs
SAF-LOG101
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 3:
Project Development
Motion Control
Fundamentals
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Function Block
Programming
CCP143
4 Days
2.8 CEUs
CCN130
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCP152
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Motion Programming
Using Ladder Logic
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:
Structured Text/
Sequential Function
Chart Programming
CCP154
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix System
Fundamentals
Choose 1
ControlLogix
Elective Course
Assessment
or
CCN142
3 Days
2.1 CEUs
RSLogix 5000 Level 5:
Advanced Motion
Programming
CCN190-LD
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
Core Courses
188
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Note: CCP146 or CCP299 may
be replaced with CIA101 if
you have already completed
the Fundamentals course.
No other substitutions
are permitted.
Elective Courses
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Curriculum maps 2-page spreads:Layout 1
5/6/2010
3:02 PM
Page 29
PowerFlex Drives Certificate Curriculum
DeviceNet
Option
ControlNet
Option
AC/DC Motors and
Drives Fundamentals
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
AC/DC Motors and
Drives Fundamentals
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CCA101
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCA163
1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCA101
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CCA163
1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control Configuration
and Startup
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications on
ControlNet
CCA161
1 Day
0.7 CEUs
CCA164
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
PowerFlex 700 Vector
Control
Communications on
DeviceNet
Choose 2 Drives Elective Courses
CCA162
1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 400 AC Drive
Field Start Up for HVAC
Applications
CCA171-LD
1 Day
PowerFlex 400/70/700
AC Drive Field Start Up
for Water Wastewater
Applications
CCA174-LD 2 Days
1.4 CEUs
EtherNet I/P Design
and Troubleshooting
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:
ControlLogix System
Fundamentals
CCP178
3 Days
2.1 CEUs
CCP146
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
DeviceNet Option
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
PowerFlex 755
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
PowerFlex DC Drive
Start Up and
Configuration
PowerFlex DC Drive
Troubleshooting
CCA180
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CDD161
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
CDD163
1 Day
0.7 CEUs
PowerFlex 700S
Phase ll Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
DeviceNet and
RSNetWorx
Configuration and
Troubleshooting
CCP164
3 Days
2.1 CEUs
ControlNet and
RSNetWorx
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCP172
2 Days
1.4 CEUs
PFX700S2-LD 3 Days
ArmorStart Distributed
Motor Controller
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
CCA190
1 Day
0.7 CEUs
Assessment
ControlNet Option
Elective Courses
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
189
20_Certificate Program
190
5/6/2010
2:42 PM
Page 190
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
21_Assessment Services
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 191
Assessment Services
Assessment Services
21_Assessment Services
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 192
Integrated Performance Assessment
Do you know what might be contributing to
your employees’ lack of performance?
Do you suspect your employees are
contributing to downtime?
Do you want to determine the skill set of your
current workforce for future training?
When you schedule an assessment, a
Rockwell Automation training analyst visits
your facility to evaluate your employees’ skills
and knowledge of automation and control
equipment for specific jobs and tasks
(maintenance, programming, etc.).
Rockwell Automation provides you with
supporting information and recommendations to
improve employee performance while remaining
closely aligned to your company’s business goals.
Deliverables
Rockwell Automation provides you with a written
report that offers these specific deliverables:
• Detailed job task analysis
• Skill gap identification
• In-depth assessment of employee training needs
• Customized curriculum map and course
descriptions (for your group of employees)
• Training implementation recommendations
• Training prioritization and rankings
• Job performance support tools
• ROI forecasts
Assessment Services
To start an Integrated Performance Assessment,
contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor.
NEW! Training Advisor
Training Advisor is an online solution for assessing
your employees' training needs.
For more information, refer to the inside cover of
this catalog and visit our website at
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training.
192
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Value Where It Counts
Rockwell Automation Integrated Performance
Assessments can help boost plant productivity,
positively impact plant metrics, and reduce total
training time and cost by focusing your human
resource investment where it counts – on specific
employee performance improvement and job
requirements. It is the most systematic and
comprehensive consulting service available in
the industry.
Our process is simple:
1.Your employees participate in one-on-one
interviews with the training analyst to discuss
training needs.
2.Your employees complete a skills assessment
related to their specific job tasks.
3.The Rockwell Automation training analyst
interviews direct supervisors and managers to
clarify and enhance data collected during the
assessment.
4.Rockwell Automation submits a written report
summarizing the findings and providing
recommendations for training.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
21_Assessment Services
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 193
Pre- and Post-test Assessments
Allow us to demonstrate the value of our Training Solutions!
Free Service with On-Site Training
Rockwell Automation offers pre- and post-test assessments
with all standard, on-site, training courses. Pre- and post-tests
are value-added assessments used to measure students’
knowledge at the beginning and end of training.
Measurable Value
Our pre- and post-test services provide you
with a measurable return on your training
investment by capturing data that quantifies
students’ knowledge increase as a result of
completing Rockwell Automation training.
Training Justification
If you are not certain your employees need a
particular course, allow Rockwell Automation
to administer a pretest assessment. The results can help you
determine whether your employees will benefit from the
training. Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office
or Allen-Bradley distributor to schedule and coordinate the
details.
Benefits
Assessment Services
• Measures students’ knowledge
• Provides quantitative training data
• Offers students constructive feedback on technical
skills and knowledge at the beginning and end of class
• Offers a benchmark against which to measure growth
and training value-add
To understand more about Training Assessment Services:
Visit www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or email [email protected]
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
193
21_Assessment Services
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 194
Course Selection Tool
Not sure if a course is right for you?
The Rockwell Automation Course Selection Tool
helps you answer this question and make confident
decisions about enrolling in Rockwell Automation
training courses.
If you are looking for justification or confirmation
that Rockwell Automation training is for you, then
the Course Selection Tool is an invaluable resource.
Access the Course Selection Tool at:
The Course Selection Tool offers you free short
course assessments used to measure your knowledge
of technical topics covered in Rockwell Automation
training courses. Results from the assessments help
you determine whether you should enroll in a course
or consider enrolling in another course that will
better meet your skill and knowledge needs.
All course assessments are free and results are
kept confidential.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Assessments are available for courses in
these technologies:
• Communications
• Condition monitoring
• Drives
• Programmable controllers
• Visualization
Assessment Services
194
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 195
Enrollment &
Registration
Enrollment and Registration
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 196
Enrollment and Registration
How to Enroll
Training and Materials
Enrolling is easy! Choose one of these methods:
Printed materials provided in Rockwell Automation
training courses are copyrighted and may not be
reproduced. No audio or visual recording of
Rockwell Automation training courses, or
Rockwell Automation personnel teaching such
courses, may be taken or reproduced electronically.
• View the Rockwell Automation scheduled courses
then download and complete the online training
registration request form located on the Training Services
website: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
• Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or
Allen-Bradley distributor.
• Call a Rockwell Automation Training Coordinator at
440-646-3434 (Option 4).
• Fax a training registration form to your local
Rockwell Automation Training Coordinator or
Allen-Bradley distributor.
• E-mail training inquiries to:
[email protected]
Class size is limited to maximize individual attention.
Register early, since Rockwell Automation training classes
frequently fill to capacity.
For registration assistance, contact your local
Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley
distributor. Or, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) to be routed
to the nearest Rockwell Automation Training Coordinator.
Training Schedules and Pricing
Refer to the Training Services website for current
schedules and course tuition.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Cancellation Policy
Cancellation of registration for a Rockwell Automation
course less than 14 days prior to the start date is subject to
a cancellation fee of 50% of the tuition. If a student fails to
appear for a scheduled course, full tuition will be charged.
Enrollment &
Registration
Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that students only
make refundable travel and lodging arrangements.
Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter course
schedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue,
or cancel courses.
196
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Rockwell Automation Training Offices
Rockwell Automation training is conducted in
several cities across the country and in Canada.
Call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) to be routed to the
nearest Rockwell Automation training coordinator in
one of these locations:
U.S.
Atlanta
Boston
Charlotte
Chicago
Cincinnati
Cleveland
Dallas
Davenport
Denver
Detroit
Houston
Indianapolis
Kalamazoo
Little Rock
Los Angeles
Milwaukee
Minneapolis
Nashville
New York City
Philadelphia
Richmond
Rochester
San Francisco
Seattle
St. Louis
Tampa
Canada
Brampton
Calgary
Cambridge
Dartmouth
Edmonton
Montreal
Vancouver
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 197
Technical Training Registration Form
Customer Information
print clearly!
Payment Option (Circle One):
Payment Reference Number:
First Name:
Title/Position:
Company:
Company Address:
City:
Telephone Number:
Last Name:
Middle Initial:
State/Province:
Fax Number:
Zip Code:
Purchase Order | Check | Voucher Account
Date:
(corresponds to the Payment Option selected)
E-Mail Address:
(Please complete, if other than course attendee)
Contact Name:
Telephone Number:
Fax Number:
Course Information
Course Code
Course Title
Course Date
Distributor Information
Course Location/City
For Distributor Use Only
Distributor’s Purchase Order Number:
Distributor Name & Address:
Contact Name:
Distributor Telephone Number:
Distributor Passport ID Number:
Distributor Fax Number:
Customer Passport ID Number:
Enrollment &
Registration
Terms and Conditions for Rockwell Automation Training Services:
• Payment must be secured by one of the above methods before enrollment can be confirmed.
• If paying by purchase order, credit card, or check, please register through your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
• Registration cancellation less than 14 days prior to the course start date is subject to a fee equal to 50% of the course tuition.
• Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that you only make “refundable” travel & lodging arrangements.
• Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter course schedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue, or cancel courses.
E-mail or fax this form to your local authorized distributor to register.
Call (440) 646-3434 (option 4) or e-mail [email protected] with questions.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
197
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 198
Enrollment &
Registration
198
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 199
Technical Training Registration Form
Customer Information
print clearly!
Payment Option (Circle One):
Payment Reference Number:
First Name:
Title/Position:
Company:
Company Address:
City:
Telephone Number:
Last Name:
Middle Initial:
State/Province:
Fax Number:
Zip Code:
Purchase Order | Check | Voucher Account
Date:
(corresponds to the Payment Option selected)
E-Mail Address:
(Please complete, if other than course attendee)
Contact Name:
Telephone Number:
Fax Number:
Course Information
Course Code
Course Title
Course Date
Distributor Information
Course Location/City
For Distributor Use Only
Distributor’s Purchase Order Number:
Distributor Name & Address:
Contact Name:
Distributor Telephone Number:
Distributor Passport ID Number:
Distributor Fax Number:
Customer Passport ID Number:
Enrollment &
Registration
Terms and Conditions for Rockwell Automation Training Services:
• Payment must be secured by one of the above methods before enrollment can be confirmed.
• If paying by purchase order, credit card, or check, please register through your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
• Registration cancellation less than 14 days prior to the course start date is subject to a fee equal to 50% of the course tuition.
• Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that you only make “refundable” travel & lodging arrangements.
• Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter course schedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue, or cancel courses.
E-mail or fax this form to your local authorized distributor to register.
Call (440) 646-3434 (option 4) or e-mail [email protected] with questions.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
199
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 200
Enrollment &
Registration
200
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 201
Technical Training Registration Form
Customer Information
print clearly!
Payment Option (Circle One):
Payment Reference Number:
First Name:
Title/Position:
Company:
Company Address:
City:
Telephone Number:
Last Name:
Middle Initial:
State/Province:
Fax Number:
Zip Code:
Purchase Order | Check | Voucher Account
Date:
(corresponds to the Payment Option selected)
E-Mail Address:
(Please complete, if other than course attendee)
Contact Name:
Telephone Number:
Fax Number:
Course Information
Course Code
Course Title
Course Date
Distributor Information
Course Location/City
For Distributor Use Only
Distributor’s Purchase Order Number:
Distributor Name & Address:
Contact Name:
Distributor Telephone Number:
Distributor Passport ID Number:
Distributor Fax Number:
Customer Passport ID Number:
Enrollment &
Registration
Terms and Conditions for Rockwell Automation Training Services:
• Payment must be secured by one of the above methods before enrollment can be confirmed.
• If paying by purchase order, credit card, or check, please register through your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
• Registration cancellation less than 14 days prior to the course start date is subject to a fee equal to 50% of the course tuition.
• Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that you only make “refundable” travel & lodging arrangements.
• Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter course schedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue, or cancel courses.
E-mail or fax this form to your local authorized distributor to register.
Call (440) 646-3434 (option 4) or e-mail [email protected] with questions.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
201
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 202
Enrollment &
Registration
202
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 203
Index
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000
CIA101
9
CCP146
9
CCP299
CCP710
10
10
CCCL21
11
CCP151
11
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced Programming
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Installation
and Data Monitoring
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Embedded
Web Server Management
MicroLogix 1400 Processor Installation,
Data Monitoring, and Embedded Web
Server Management
CCP153
12
Safety
CCN200
CCP711
CCP143
12
13
13
CCP154
14
CCN142
14
CCN190-LD
CCP152
PRS012
15
15
16
CCP298
16
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
CCP146
Machine Safety Seminar
SAF-SEM
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller
Systems Fundamentals
SAF-PLC101
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System Maintenance
and Troubleshooting Fundamentals
SAF-ELE101-LD
GuardLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting
SAF-LOG102
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
SAF-PLC102
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System
Authorized Maintenance and Troubleshooting
SAF-ELE102-LD
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development
CCP143
GuardLogix Application Development
SAF-LOG101
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems
Programming
SAF-PLC103
CCP122
20
CCP412
20
CCP409
CCP410
CCP411
CCP710
CCPS65
21
21
22
22
23
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Programming
PLC-5 to ControlLogix Transitioning
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
CCP122
CCPS65
28
28
CCPS43
29
CCPS45
CCPS41
CCPS42
29
30
30
CCPM41
31
CCPM43
31
CCPM44
32
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
Networks
Introduction to Automation and the Integrated
Architecture System
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications
EtherNet/IP Design and Troubleshooting
NetLinx Maintenance and Troubleshooting
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Design and Configuration
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration
and Troubleshooting
Data Highway/Ethernet Peer-to-Peer Communications
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
on DeviceNet
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
on ControlNet
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
CIA101
CCPS65
CCP178
CCP177
CCP170
46
46
47
47
48
CCP164
CCP310-LD
48
49
CCA162
49
CCA164
50
CCP172
50
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
203
_____Index
Introduction to Automation and the Integrated
Architecture System
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix
System Fundamentals
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
PLC-5 to ControlLogix Transitioning
RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
Interpretation
RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic
Programming
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: ControlLogix Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Kinetix 6000 Level 4: Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: PhaseManager Project Design
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Structured Text/Sequential
Fuction Chart Programming
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming
Using Ladder Logic
RSLogix 5000 Level 5: Advanced Motion
Programming
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Function Block Programming
Fuzzy Logic Design and Development
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: CompactLogix Fundamentals
and Troubleshooting
SLC 500/RSLogix 500 - Cont.
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 204
Index (cont.)
Visualization
Introduction to Automation and the Integrated
Architecture System
RSView32 Project Maintenance
FactoryTalk View SE Maintenance and Troubleshooting
(formerly RSView SE)
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400
and PanelBuilder32 Application Development
RSView32 Project Development
FactoryTalk View SE Programming
(formerly RSView SE)
FactoryTalk View SE Architecture
(formerly RSView SE)
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus Conversions
(formerly RSView ME)
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus Programming
(formerly RSView ME)
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Drives
CIA101
CCP200
56
56
CCV206-LD
57
CCP196
CCV201
57
58
CCV207
58
CCV205-LD
59
CCV202
59
CCV204
60
CCV209
60
Motion Control
Introduction to Automation and the Integrated
Architecture System
Motion Control Fundamentals
1394 and GML Commander Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
Kinetix 6000 Level 4: Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
RSLogix 5000 Level 5: Advanced
Motion Programming
Ultra 3000 Programming
1394 and GML Commander Programming
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming
Using Ladder Logic
Index_____
204
CIA101
CCN130
66
66
CCN183
67
CCN200
67
CCN190-LD
CCN191-LD
CCN184
68
68
69
CCN142
69
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals
1336 PLUS Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1395 Drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
AutoMax Maintenance and Troubleshooting
1336 PLUS II Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex DC Drive Troubleshooting (on-site only)
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 755 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PowerFlex DC Drive Startup and
Configuration (on-site only)
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
on DeviceNet
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications
on ControlNet
PowerFlex 400 AC Drive Field Start Up
for HVAC Applications
PowerFlex 400/70/700 AC Drive Field Start Up
for Water Wastewater Applications
IntelliCENTER and DeviceNet Configuration
AutoMax Programming Fundamentals
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration
and Startup
CCA101
CCA129
CDD131
74
74
75
PFX700S2-LD
RE0520
CCA137
75
76
76
CCA163
CDD163
77
77
CCA190
CCA180
78
78
CDD161
79
CCA162
79
CCA164
80
CCA171-LD
80
CCA174-LD
CCI106-LD
RE0523
81
81
82
CCA161
82
PRS010
CCPC02-LD
PRS012
CCP152
86
86
87
87
RS-ABATRG
CCP711
88
88
RS-BATRG
PRS013
89
89
Process Control
PID Loop Development and Tuning
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Basics
Fuzzy Logic Design and Development
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Function Block Programming
FactoryTalk Batch Phase Design
(formerly RSBizWare Batch)
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: PhaseManager Project Design
FactoryTalk Batch Server and Configuration Tools
(formerly RSBizWare Batch)
PlantPAx Process Automation System Integration
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 205
Condition Monitoring
Vibration Analysis Fundamentals
Vibration Analysis: Level 1
Vibration Analysis: Level ll
Vibration Analysis: Level III
Dynamic Balancing
Time Waveform Analysis
XM System Fundamentals
Emonitor Basic
Emonitor Advanced
Datapac Applications
Enpac Applications
EK-ICM101
EK-ICM201
EK-ICM261
EK-ICM301
EK-ICM121
EK-ICM281
EK-ICM165
EK-ICM141
EK-ICM221
EK-ICM161
EK-ICM162
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
99
Software Courses
FactoryTalk AssetCentre Configuration
RS-FTACC
Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalk Introduction
(formerly RSBizWare)
RS-MSSQLB
FactoryTalk Metrics with Historian Classic Configuration RS-FTMHCC
RSMACC Installation and Configuration
RS-RSMACC
FactoryTalk Transaction Manager (formerly RSSQL)
RS-FTTM
RSTestStand Enterprise Project Development
RS-RSTS101-LD
FactoryTalk Historian Machine Edition
Configuration and Data Collection
RS-FTHMEC
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition Configuration
and Data Collection
RS-FTHSEC
FactoryTalk Historian Site Edition Data
Analyzing and Reporting
RS-FTHSEDA
FactoryTalk VantagePoint Configuration
and Reporting
RS-FTVP
FactoryTalk VantagePoint EMI
Configuration and Reporting
RS-FTVPEMI
Power Monitor Installation and RSEnergyMetrix Software
Configuration in an Energy Monitoring System
RS-EMPM
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
103
103
104
105
105
106
106
107
107
108
108
109
Industrial, Quality, and
Management Courses
Lean Learning Academy
LEAN517
*
Electrical Substation and Distribution Maintenance
SAF-SFT108
*
Blue Sky and Master Scheduling
LEAN503
*
Lean Preparation Boot Camp
LEAN516
*
Influencing and Persuading Skills
PER602
*
Presentation Skills Development
PER604
*
Lean Fundamentals
LEAN501
*
Industrial Hoist and Rigging Fundamentals
MFG243
*
Pipe Identification and Labeling
MFG223
*
Effective Performance Appraisal Delivery
PER603
*
Value Stream Mapping
LEAN502
*
Lean Launch Implementation
LEAN504
*
Lean Layout and Design
LEAN505
*
Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) Fundamentals
LEAN507
*
Standardized Work Implementation
LEAN508
*
5S/Visual Management Implementation
LEAN509
*
Process Problem Solving
LEAN510
*
Just-in-Time (JIT) Implementation
LEAN511
*
Quick Changeover Implementation
LEAN512
*
Kanban Integration
LEAN513
*
Error Proofing Implementation
LEAN514
*
Kaizen Implementation
LEAN515
*
Machine Safety Seminar
SAF-SEM
115
Lock-out/Tag-out Implementation
SAF-SFT100
115
Electrical Safety Awareness
SAF-SFT101
116
NFPA 70E – Arc Flash Awareness
SAF-SFT106
116
Confined Space Entry Awareness
SAF-SFT110
117
NFPA 70E – Electrical Safety and Arc Flash Compliance SAF-SFT112
117
Lock-out/Tag-out Implementation and
Arc Flash Awareness
SAF-SFT117
118
Plant Floor Arc Flash/LOTO/Confined Space Safety
SAF-SFT123
118
2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) Change Awareness SAF-SFT120
119
Industrial Electrical Controls Fundamentals
MFG213
119
Basics of Electricity
MFG244
120
Industrial Air Controls (Pneumatic) Fundamentals
MFG202
120
Industrial Hydraulic Equipment Troubleshooting
MFG236
121
Industrial Fluid Power Fundamentals
MFG214
121
Resistance Welding Inspection
MFG229
122
Resistance Welding Technology
MFG230
122
Computer Numerical Control Fundamentals
MFG217
123
Fundamentals of Predictive Maintenance
MFG245
124
* Information about these courses can be obtained from the Training Services
website at: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
205
_____Index
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 206
Index (cont.)
Computer-Based Training
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software –
Applications and Displays
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software –
Drawing Objects
RSTrainer for FactoryTalk View ME Software –
Interactive Objects
RSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –
Project Configuration
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –
Offline Programming
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –
Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Motion
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5 Software
RSTrainer for SLC 500 - Hardware Fundamentals
RSTrainer for SLC 500 - Programming
Fundamentals
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Offline Programming
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Online Monitoring
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –
Documenting and Searching
RSCompanion for SLC 500
and MicroLogix Processors
RSTrainer for Hydraulics
RSTrainer for RSLinx Software
RSTrainer Enterprise Edition for Student Manager
RSTrainer for SLC 500 Fundamentals
RSTrainer for Ethernet/IP –
Hardware and IP Addressing
RSTrainer for Ethernet/IP –
Communications and Diagnostics
Modular Programming for Machine Applications
Index_____
206
Web-Based Training
9393-RSTVMEPT1
130
9393-RSTVMEPT2
130
9393-RSTVMEPT3
9393-RSTCLX
131
131
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ
132
9393-RSTLX5KOFF
132
9393-RSTLX5KON
9393-RSTLX5KMOT
9393-RSTLX5
9393-RSTSLCHENE
133
133
134
134
9393-RSTSLCPENE
135
9393-RST500OFENE 135
9393-RST500ONENE 136
9393-RST500DSENE 136
9393-RSCOMP500
9393-RSTHYD
9393-RSTLINX
9393-RSTSMGRENF
9393-RSTSLC
Fundamentals of AC/DC Motors and Drives
PLC Fundamentals
RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays
RSView ME Software – Drawing Objects
RSView ME Software – Interactive Objects
SLC 500 – Hardware Fundamentals
SLC 500 – Programming Fundamentals
RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring
RSLogix 500 Software – Documenting and Searching
RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
RSLogix 5000 Software – Motion
Industrial Electrical
Industrial Mechanical
Industrial Hydraulics
Industrial Pneumatics
Mobile Hydraulics
Mobile Electrical
Ethernet/IP – Hardware and IP Addressing
Ethernet/IP – Communications and Diagnostics
144
144
145
145
146
146
147
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
152
152
153
153
154
154
137
137
138
138
139
9393-RSTENET1ENE 139
9393-RSTENET2ENE 140
ABT-MODPROG
140
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 207
Workstations
Number
Integrated Architecture Workstation
ABT-TDIA
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
(7-Slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX2
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
and No Controller (7-Slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX2NP
ControlLogix Motion Ultra 100
Workstation (10-Slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX1
ControlLogix Motion Ultra 100 Workstation No Controller (10-Slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX1NP
ControlLogix Workstation No Motion (10-Slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX3
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion
and No Controller (10-Slot chassis)
ABT-TDCLX3NP
ControlLogix Motion Workstation
(10-Slot chassis with Ultra 3000)
ABT-TDCLX3K
CompactLogix Workstation
ABT-TDIA-LITE
GuardLogix Controller Workstation
ABT-TDGRDLX1
GuardPLC Workstation
ABT-TDGRDPLC1
PowerFlex 700 Workstation
ABT-TDPF700
PowerFlex 755 Workstation
ABT-TDPF755
Fan Demo Unit
ABT-TDPF700FAN
1336 FORCE AC Drive Workstation
ABT-TD1336T
1336 IMPACT AC Drive Workstation
ABT-TD1336E
1336 PLUS II AC Drive Workstation
ABT-TD1336F
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation ABT-TD20941 (120V AC)
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation ABT-TD20942 (230V AC)
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation ABT-TD20943 (230V AC)
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive
Workstation with SafeOff
ABT-TD2094SO
Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation
ABT-TD20981 (120V AC)
Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation
ABT-TD20982 (230V AC)
Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation
ABT-TD20983 (230V AC)
ArmorStart Workstation
ABT-TDARMORDMC
1771 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDPLC1 (120V AC)
1771 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDPLC2 (220V AC)
1746 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDSLC1 (120V AC)
1746 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDSLC2 (220V AC)
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation ABT-TDUIO1 (120V AC)
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation ABT-TDUIO2 (240V AC)
ControlNet Workstation
ABT-TDCNET1
DeviceNet Workstation
ABT-TDDNET2
EtherNet/IP Workstation
ABT-TDENETIP
Advanced Communications Workstation ABT-TDCLXCOM
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Page
Workstation
Number
Page
159
XM Workstation
Intelligent Motor Control Workstation
Intelligent Motor Control Workstation
with XM
IntelliCENTER Workstation
Process Workstation
PanelView 600 Workstation
PanelView 1000 Workstation
PanelView Plus Workstation
ABT-TDXM-VIB
ABT-TDIMC
173
173
ABT-TDIMCXM
ABT-TDINTCENTER
ABT-TDPROCESS
ABT-TDPV600TC01
ABT-TDPV1000TC01
ABT-TDPVPLUSTC01
174
174
175
175
176
176
159
160
160
161
161
162
162
163
163
164
164
165
165
166
166
167
167
167
167
Products/Services
Title
Page
Job Aids
178
Training Voucher Account
184
Certificate Program
186
Integrated Performance Assessment
192
Pre- and Posttest Assessments
193
Course Selection Tool
194
Enrollment and Registration
196
168
168
168
168
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
171
171
172
172
© 2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
207
_____Index
Workstation
22_Enrollment_Registration_Index
5/6/2010
2:43 PM
Page 208
Notes
208
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P
Rockwell Automation
Services & Support
Global Support. Local Address. Peace of Mind.
Providing the resources you need, when and where you need them,
Rockwell Automation has an integrated, global network of ISO-certified
repair centers, exchange hubs, field service professionals, IACET-recognized
training centers, certified technical phone support centers and online tools.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services
Meeting your everyday technical needs
Training Services
• Instructor-led, computer-based,
web-based courses
• Workstations
• Job aids
• Knowledge assessments
Repair Services
• Remanufacturing services
• Third party repair
• Annual repair agreements
• Renewal parts
OnSite Support
• Embedded Engineering
• Migrations & Conversions
• Preventive Maintenance
• Startup & Commissioning
Online & Phone Support
• System-level support
• Unlimited, real-time support
• Unlimited, on-line resources
and tools
Maximizing your automation investment
MRO Asset Management
• Warranty tracking
• Consolidated asset reports
• Quick access to global spare
parts inventory
• Owned & managed spare
parts inventory
Safety & Energy Services
• Machine safety assessments
• Safety design, integration,
validation services
• General & comprehensive
energy audits
Network & Security Services
• Control system life cycle
services
• Manage network convergence
• Security technology, policies
and procedure services
InSite Managed Services
• Convergence-enabled
managed application
support services
• Advanced surveillance services
• Knowledge management and
hosting technologies
Visit the Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase, www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase,
for technical information and assistance, plus:
- View technical/application notes
- Obtain software patches
- Subscribe for product/service email notifications
- Submit a Questions, Live Chat and Support Forums, and more
In the U.S./Canada, call 440.646.3434 to obtain Repair Services, Phone Support, Onsite Support Callout
Services, or to register for Instructor-led Training.
Visit Get Support Now, www.rockwellautomation.com/support to select your country and find your
local support information.
Train Serv Cat Cover:**Train Serv CatSAF6A.qxd
4/26/2010
2:36 PM
Page 4
Tell Us What You Think.
Rockwell Automation strives to provide training courses and
instructional products that help you succeed on the job. If you attended
a Rockwell Automation instructor-led course, or purchased one of
our training products, we’d like to know about your experience.
We welcome feedback
from supervisors or
managers who
supported their
employees’ training
experience or
purchased our
training products.
To provide your input, go to
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training and
click on the survey link in the top right area.
1336 FORCE, 1336 IMPACT, 1336 PLUS, 1336 PLUS II, CNC, CompactBlock I/O, CompactLogix, ControlLogix, Data Highway Plus, Datapac, DH+, DriveExecutive, DriveExplorer,
DriveLogix, DriveTools, ElectroGuard, Emonitor, Enpac, FactoryTalk, FlexLogix, GML, GuardLogix, GuardPLC, Kinetix, Logix5000, PanelBuilder, PanelView, PhaseManager, PLC, PLC-5,
PowerFlex, RSBizWare, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSLogix 5000, RSMACC, RSNetWorx, RSView, SCANport, SIGMA, SLC, SoftLogix, Ultra, VersaView, and XM are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.
HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
Foundation Fieldbus is a trademark of Fieldbus Foundation.
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Publication GMST10-CA001G-EN-P – June 2010
Supersedes Publication GMST10-CA001F-EN-P – November 2009
Copyright ©2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement